Nokia Solutions and Networks T6ER1 SC4812ETLite 1.9 GHz 1X/EVDO User Manual

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ETLite 1.9 GHz 1X/EVDO Users Manual

Users Manual

1X SCt4812ET Lite BTSOptimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x800 MHz and 1.9 GHzCDMAEnglish08/01/200168P09253A60–1PRELIMINARY
FOANoticeWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from anyinaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has beencarefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to makechanges from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does notassume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it conveylicense under its patent rights or the rights of others.It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to meanthat Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.CopyrightsThis instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrightedMotorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States andother countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorolamaterial contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase ofMotorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under thecopyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.Usage and Disclosure RestrictionsLicense AgreementThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and maybe used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.Copyrighted MaterialsSoftware and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software ordocumentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language orcomputer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.High Risk ActivitiesComponents, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safecontrols: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, LifeSupport, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or impliedwarranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.Trademarks and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiledherein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.Copyright Copyright 2001 Motorola, Inc. All Rights ReservedPrinted on Recyclable PaperREV012501SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
08/01/2001 i1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable of Contents1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.xList of Figures iv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Tables vii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Requirements xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Safety xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision History xx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patent Notification xxi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1: IntroductionOptimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents and Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Identification 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Assembly Location and Identification 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Sector Configurations 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2: Preliminary OperationsPreliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power Up 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3: Optimization/CalibrationOptimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CDMA LMF 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001iiPinging the Processors 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Testing 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5: Leaving the SiteUpdating Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6: Basic TroubleshootingBasic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS – Fault Isolation 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents – continued08/01/2001 iii1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix A: Data SheetsOptimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Serial Number Check List A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test MatrixFRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output ConsiderationsBBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency InformationCDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American PCS Bands . D-1Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming InformationPN Offset Programming Information E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F: Test Equipment PreparationTest Equipment Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G: Download ROM CodeDownloading ROM Code with the LMF G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix H: In–Service CalibrationIntroduction H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration H-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Service Calibration H-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index
PRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001ivList of Figures1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.xFigure 1-1: SC4812ET Lite Logical BTS Span Cabling 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2: SC4812ET Lite BTS Frame 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity) 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4: 50–Pair Punchblock 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5: SCCP Shelf, IS–95A/B and 1X Devices 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6: RF Interface Panel, DRDCs Installed 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7: RF Interface Panel, TRDCs Installed 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-8: RFDS, DRDC, and TRDC Details 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-9: SC4812ET Lite LPA Configuration with Bandpass Filters(Starter Frame Mapping Only) 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2: External Ethernet LAN Connectors 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3: Frame Power Subassemblies, North American and International Cabinets 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – North American 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – International 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6: DC PDA 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-7: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – North American 2-11. . . . Figure 2-8: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – International 2-12. . . . . . . Figure 2-9: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-10: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit Breakers 2-18. . . . . . . Figure 3-1: CDMA LMF Folder Structure 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2: BTS Folder Name Syntax Example 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3: CAL File Name Syntax Example 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4: CDF Name Syntax Example 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5: Code Load File Name Syntax Example 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6: DDS File Name Syntax Example 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7: Disconnecting Span Lines 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8: Rear and Front View of CSU Shelf 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Figures – continued08/01/2001 v1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 3-9: 50–Pair Punchblock 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10: LMF Connection Detail 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-27. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test Setup 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935) 3-51. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest 3-52. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 andAdvantest) 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21: Battery Over–Temperature Sensor 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22: MAP Connector J8 (Rear of MAP) 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples 4-17Figure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D-1. . . Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference F-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-5: Power Meter Detail F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-6: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail F-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-7: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface F-17. . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-8: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R3465 F-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437 H-5. . . . . . . . . .
List of Figures – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001viFigure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A H-5. . . Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437 H-8. . . . . . . . . Figure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267 H-8. . . . . . . . . . Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to HP437 H-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to E6380A H-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437 H-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A H-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437 H-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465 H-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-11: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler – Agilent Test Equipment H-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-12: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler – Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment H-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS – Agilent Test Equipment H-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS – Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment H-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
08/01/2001 vii1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYList of Tables1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.xTable 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-3: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-16. . . . . . . . Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-5: Sector Configurations 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application Test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4: AC Voltage Measurements 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC Power 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6: DC Power Application and Tests 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-9: Power Removal 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1: CD ROM Installation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal Connection 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-5: Punchdown Location for 50–Pair Punch Block 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-34. . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001viiiTable 3-16: Select CSM Clock Source 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-17: Enable CSMs 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-18: Enable MCCs 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-39. . . . . . . . . Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-56. . Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-26: Cable Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-32: SC4812ET Lite BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration) 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-34: All Cal/Audit Path Calibration 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-35: TX Calibration Test 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-36: Download BLO 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-37: TX Path Audit 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-38: Create CAL File 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-45: RFDS Calibration 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-46: Program NAM Procedure 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-47: Alarm Testing Preparation 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-48: Heat Exchanger Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-49: ACLC and Power Entry Door Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-50: AC Fail Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued08/01/2001 ix1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-51: Minor Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Single–Carrier System 3-88. . . . Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Single–Carrier System 3-88Table 3-54: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Two–Carrier System 3-89. . . . . . Table 3-55: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Two–Carrier System 3-90. Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature Alarm 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-57: Rectifier Over–Temperature Alarm 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests 4-3. . . . . . . . Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-9: Test FER 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-6: Remove LMF 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 Spans 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the Site 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LAN 6-2. . . . . . . . . Table 6-3: GLI IP Address Setting 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . Table 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-9: LPA Errors 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-10: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xTable 6-12: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-15Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-16: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s) 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-18: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s) 6-22. . Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2 6-22. . . . . Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-21: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located BBX2s 6-23. . . . Table 6-22: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-23. . . . . . . Table 6-23: No MCC24/MCC8E Channel Elements 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-26: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path 6-26. . . . . Table 6-29: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2: Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-3: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix B-3. . . . . . . . Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) C-1. . . . . . . . . Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued08/01/2001 xi1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium Reference F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium Reference F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-3: System Connectivity F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-9: Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-10: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-14. . . . . . Table F-12: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-3. . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-6. . . . . . . . . . . Table H-3: Agilent E6380A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-9. . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure H-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-6: In–Service Calibration H-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ForewordPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xiiScope of manualThis manual is intended for use by cellular telephone systemcraftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular systemequipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of thisinformation has a general understanding of telephony, as used in theoperation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and isfamiliar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellularmobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is notexpected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internaloperation of the equipment.This document covers only the steps required to verify the functionalityof the RF Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment prior to systemlevel testing, and is intended to supplement site specific applicationinstructions. It also should be used in conjunction with existing productmanuals. Additional steps may be required.This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipmenttraining offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement orenhance the knowledge gained through such training.Text conventionsThe following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point outinformation that must be read. This information may be set-off from thesurrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.The four categories of these special paragraphs are:Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information thatyou can use.NOTEPresents information to help you avoid an undesirablesituation or provides additional information to help youunderstand a topic or concept.IMPORTANT*Presents information to identify a situation in whichequipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage toequipment.CAUTIONPresents information to warn you of a potentiallyhazardous situation in which there is a possibility ofpersonal injury.WARNING
Foreword – continued08/01/2001 xiii1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYThe following special paragraphs are used in tables in the manual topoint out information that must be read.NOTEPresents additional, helpful non-critical information that you can use.* IMPORTANTPresents information to help you avoid an undesirable situation orprovide additional information to help you understand a topic orconcept.! CAUTIONPresents information to identify a situation where equipment damagecould occur and help you avoid damaging your equipment.n WARNINGPresents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous situationwhere there is a possibility of personal injury (serious or otherwise).Changes to manualChanges that occur after the printing date are incorporated into yourmanual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in thismanual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options andprocedures become available for general use or when engineeringchanges occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should beretained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a listof all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.Receiving updatesTechnical Education & Documentation (TED) maintains a customerdatabase that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shippedsince the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identifiedin this database is a “key” individual (such as DocumentationCoordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updatesfrom TED as they are released.To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it isimportant that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to theinformation in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),please contact Technical Education & Documentation at:MOTOROLA, INC.Technical Education & Documentation1 Nelson C. White ParkwayMundelein, Illinois 60060U.S.A.Phone: Within U.S.A. and Canada 800-872-8225. . . . . Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1-847-435–5700. . FAX: +1-847-435–5541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xivReporting manual errorsIn the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in yourmanual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure toinclude your name and address, the complete manual title and partnumber (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the pagenumber (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. Weappreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
FCC Requirements08/01/2001 xv1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYContentThis section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for theSCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series RF Base Transceiver Stations (BTS).FCC Part 15 RequirementsPart 15.19a(3) – INFORMATION TO USERThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.NOTEPart 15.21 – INFORMATION TO USERChanges or modifications not expressly approved byMotorola could void your authority to operate theequipment.CAUTION
FCC Requirements – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xvi15.105(b) – INFORMATION TO USERThis equipment has been tested and found to comply withthe limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipment generates, uses andcan radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed andused in accordance with the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio communications. However,there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in aparticular installation. If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television reception, which can bedetermined by turning the equipment OFF and ON, theuser is encouraged to try to correct the interference by oneor more of the following measures:–Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.–Increase the separation between the equipment and re-ceiver.–Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differ-ent from that to which the receiver is connected.–Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technicianfor help.NOTEFCC Part 68 RequirementsThis equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules. A label inside the cabinet frame easily visiblewith the door open in the upper portion of the cabinet contains, amongother information, the FCC Registration Number and RingerEquivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, thisinformation must be provided to the telephone company.The REN is useful to determine the quantity of the devices which mayconnect to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line mayresult in the devices not ringing in response to incoming calls. In most,but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). Tobe certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line asdetermined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company todetermine the maximum REN for the calling area.If the dial–in site access modem causes harm to the telephone network,the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporarydiscontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is notpractical, the telephone company will notify you of the discontinuance assoon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file acomplaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your dial–in
FCC Requirements – continued08/01/2001 xvii1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYsite access modem. If this happens, the telephone company will provideadvance notice so that you can modify your equipment as required tomaintain uninterrupted service.If you experience trouble with the dial–in site access modem, pleasecontact:Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436NArlington Heights, Illinois 60004Phone Number: (847) 632–5390for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm tothe telephone network, the telephone company may request you todisconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is solved.You should not attempt to repair this equipment yourself. Thisequipment contains no customer or user–serviceable parts.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola couldvoid your authority to operate this equipment.
General SafetyPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xviiiRemember! . . . Safetydepends on you!!The following general safety precautions must be observed during allphases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described inthis manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specificwarnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangersof which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should followthese warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safeoperation of the equipment in your operating environment.Ground the instrumentTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must beconnected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with athree-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either pluggedinto an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with athree-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contactadapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to anelectrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack andmating plug of the power cable must meet International ElectrotechnicalCommission (IEC) safety standards.Do not operate in an explosiveatmosphereDo not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases orfumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environmentconstitutes a definite safety hazard.Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must:Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized ServicePersonnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may removeequipment covers for internal subassembly, or componentreplacement, or any internal adjustment.Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certainconditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cableremoved.Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.Do not service or adjust aloneDo not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
General Safety – continued08/01/2001 xix1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUse caution when exposing orhandling the CRTBreakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocityscattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should behandled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safetymask and gloves.Do not substitute parts ormodify equipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not installsubstitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensurethat safety features are maintained.Dangerous procedurewarningsWarnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerousprocedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in thewarnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safetyprecautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipmentin your operating environment.Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in thisequipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, andadjusting.WARNING
Revision HistoryPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xxManual Number68P09253A60Manual Title1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.xVersion InformationThe following table lists the manual version, date of version, andremarks on the version.VersionLevel Date ofIssue Remarks1 08/2/2001 Preliminary version of manual for R2.16.0 1X BTS
Patent Notification08/01/2001 xxi1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPatent numbersThis product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of thefollowing patents and other patents pending:4128740 4661790 4860281 5036515 5119508 5204876 5247544 53013534193036 4667172 4866710 5036531 5121414 5204977 5251233 53013654237534 4672657 4870686 5038399 5123014 5207491 5255292 53032404268722 4694484 4872204 5040127 5127040 5210771 5257398 53032894282493 4696027 4873683 5041699 5127100 5212815 5259021 53034074301531 4704734 4876740 5047762 5128959 5212826 5261119 53054684302845 4709344 4881082 5048116 5130663 5214675 5263047 53070224312074 4710724 4885553 5055800 5133010 5214774 5263052 53075124350958 4726050 4887050 5055802 5140286 5216692 5263055 53094434354248 4729531 4887265 5058136 5142551 5218630 5265122 53095034367443 4737978 4893327 5060227 5142696 5220936 5268933 53111434369516 4742514 4896361 5060265 5144644 5222078 5271042 53111764369520 4751725 4910470 5065408 5146609 5222123 5274844 53115714369522 4754450 4914696 5067139 5146610 5222141 5274845 53134894375622 4764737 4918732 5068625 5152007 5222251 5276685 53197124485486 4764849 4941203 5070310 5155448 5224121 5276707 53217054491972 4775998 4945570 5073909 5157693 5224122 5276906 53217374517561 4775999 4956854 5073971 5159283 5226058 5276907 53233914519096 4797947 4970475 5075651 5159593 5228029 5276911 53253944549311 4799253 4972355 5077532 5159608 5230007 5276913 53275754550426 4802236 4972432 5077741 5170392 5233633 5276915 53295474564821 4803726 4979207 5077757 5170485 5235612 5278871 53296354573017 4811377 4984219 5081641 5170492 5235614 5280630 53393374581602 4811380 4984290 5083304 5182749 5239294 5285447 D3373284590473 4811404 4992753 5090051 5184349 5239675 5287544 D3422494591851 4817157 4998289 5093632 5185739 5241545 5287556 D3422504616314 4827507 5020076 5095500 5187809 5241548 5289505 D3470044636791 4829543 5021801 5105435 5187811 5241650 5291475 D3496894644351 4833701 5022054 5111454 5193102 5241688 5295136 RE318144646038 4837800 5023900 5111478 5195108 5243653 52971614649543 4843633 5028885 5113400 5200655 5245611 52992284654655 4847869 5030793 5117441 5203010 5245629 53010564654867 4852090 5031193 5119040 5204874 5245634 5301188
Patent Notification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001xxiiNotes
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 1: IntroductionTable of ContentsOptimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions and Prerequisites 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Optimize? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is Optimization? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Happens During Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Installations 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Expansion 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Optimization 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repaired Sites 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Cable Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm–up 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents and Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard and Non–standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Overview 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical BTS Numbering 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Identification 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Components 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Assembly Location and Identification 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Assemblies and FRUs 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Cage Configuration and the 1X Devices 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Sector Configurations 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector Configuration 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Notes1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout08/01/2001 1-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYManual Scope and LayoutThis document provides information pertaining to the optimization andaudit tests of the Motorola SC4812ET Lite RF Base Transceiver Station(BTS) equipment frame and its associated internal and externalinterfaces. The following subjects are addressed: preliminary backgroundinformation; optimization, and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance TestProcedures (ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; siteturnover; troubleshooting.Most applications use the same test procedure for all equipmentvariations. However, decision break points are provided throughout theprocedure when equipment–specific tests are required. For example,when tests using external test equipment are performed instead of thoseusing the RFDS, additional test procedures and illustrations are providedto cover both applications.This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration tests, etc.)is described in chapters which are broken down into multi-page “maps.”Each “map” typically consists of pages containing all the informationnecessary to perform the test (including all required input levels, outputlevels, CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (CDMA LMF) commands,and test points required). Also described are some of the main conceptsyou must understand in the test process. Whenever possible, graphics,flowcharts, or other examples complement the information/steps.Assumptions and PrerequisitesThis document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have beeninstalled per the Frame Mounting Guide Analog/CDMA/TDMA;68P09226A18, which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC seriesequipment frames, and the SC4812ET Lite Installation; 68P09253A36,which covers BTS–specific cabling configurations.1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-2Document CompositionThis document covers the following major areas:SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (suchas component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to beconsidered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before performingoptimization or tests.SPreliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTSsub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power tothe BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloadingall BTS processor boards, test equipment set–up, RF path verification,BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio FrequencyDiagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,executed by the CDMA LMF, and used to verify all major TX and RXperformance characteristics on all BTS equipment. This chapter alsocovers generating an ATP report.SPrepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP iscompleted.SBasic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when anATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,test equipment operation, calibration, and GPS operation.SAppendices that contain pertinent PN offset, frequency programming,and output power data tables, along with additional data sheets that arefilled out manually by the CFE at the site.1
Purpose of the Optimization08/01/2001 1-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYWhy Optimize?Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.What Is Optimization?Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normalequipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combinedlosses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-intolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper siteoperation.What Happens DuringOptimizationOptimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for each receiveand transmit path at the BTS site, and stores these values in a database.SA receive path (RX) starts at the Duplexer Directional Coupler(DRDC) or Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (TRDC)antenna feedline port and travels through the DRDC/TRDC, theMulti–coupler Preselector Card (MPC) and additional splittercircuitry, ending at a Broad Band Transceiver (BBX) backplane slot inthe Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) shelf.SA transmit path (TX) starts at the SCCP shelf BBX backplane slot, isrouted to the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) Trunking Module,through the LPAs, back through the LPA Trunking Module, throughthe bandpass filter or 2–cavity combiner, and ends at theDRDC/TRDC antenna feedline port.Six of the seven BBX2 boards in each SCCP shelf are optimized tospecific RX and TX antenna ports. The seventh BBX2 board acts in aredundant capacity for BBX2 boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to allantenna ports. A single value is generated for each complete path,thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would occur fromindividually measuring and summing the gain and loss of each elementin the path.BTS equipment factors in these values internally, leaving onlysite–specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics to befactored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated Power(ERP) output power requirements.1
When to OptimizePRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-4New InstallationsAfter the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initialpower–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation andverifying transmit and receive paths.Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performanceverification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, anddownload of accumulated calibration data.A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any timeafter optimization to verify BTS calibration.After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance Test Procedure(ATP) verification tests are performed to verify alarm/redundancyperformance.After manual pre–ATP verification tests, a series of ATPs are performedto verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required before the site canbe placed in service.Site ExpansionOptimization is also required after expansion of a site with additional,interconnected BTS frames.Periodic OptimizationPeriodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on therequirements of the overall system.Repaired SitesRefer to Appendix B for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATPTest Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must beperformed any time a BTS subassembly or RF cableassociated with it is replaced.IMPORTANT*1
Required Test Equipment and Software08/01/2001 1-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPolicyTo ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteriashould be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, ofcourse, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipmentmeets the same technical specifications.It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurementvariances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introducedas a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization ortroubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on handand operating properly.Test Equipment CalibrationOptimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipmentservice, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.Follow the original equipment manufacture (OEM) recommendedmaintenance and calibration schedules closely.Test Cable CalibrationEquipment test cables are very important in optimization. It isrecommended that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the testcables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion losswithin the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cableinsertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the CDMALMF during the optimization procedure. This method requires accuratetest cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with thecharacterization information prior to field optimization.Equipment Warm–upAfter arriving at a site, the test equipment should be plugged in andturned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long aspossible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up fora minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDScalibration procedures:SCommunications test set.SRubidium time base.SPower meter.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-6Required Test Equipment andSoftwareThe following test equipment and software is required for theoptimization procedure. Common assorted tools such as screwdriversand frame keys are also needed. Read the owner’s manual for all of thetest equipment to understand its individual operation before using thetool in the optimization.Always refer to specific OEM test equipmentdocumentation for detailed operating instructions.NOTECDMA LMF Hardware RequirementsA CDMA LMF computer platform that meets the followingrequirements (or better) is recommended:SNotebook computerS266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processorS4 Gbyte internal hard disk driveSSVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolution and capability to displaymore than 265 colorsS64 MB RAM minimum (128 MB recommended)S20X CD–ROM driveS3 1/2 inch floppy driveS56kbps V.90 modemSSerial port (COM 1)SParallel port (LPT 1)SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapterSMSr Windows 98R Second Edition (SE) operating systemIf 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the CDMA LMFwindow must be maximized after it is displayed.NOTECDMA LMF SoftwareThe CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based LocalMaintenance Facility (LMF). This software product is specificallydesigned to provide cellular communications field personnel with thecapability to support the following CDMA Base Transceiver Stations(BTS) operations:1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued08/01/2001 1-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSInstallationSMaintenanceSCalibrationSOptimizationEthernet LAN Transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCOMPAQNOV96)SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589Bused withSTransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2Converter (or equivalent)Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be usedto interface the CDMA LMF Ethernet connection to theRFM frame.NOTEEthernet LAN External In/Out Port AdapterTrompeter Electronics, Inc., AD–BJ20–E1–PL75 or equivalent BNC (F)to TRB (M) adapter is required if it is necessary to connect the CDMALMF computer to the LAN external interface triaxial connectors locatedin the power entry compartment.RS–232 to GPIB interfaceSNational Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04XRS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the CDMA LMF tothe test equipment.SA standard RS–232 cable can be used with the followingmodifications:–Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others as itis a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output signal. Theother pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on each cable end:9–pin D (female) 9–pin D (female)GND 5 5 GNDRX 33 RXTX 22 TXRTS 7 7 RTSRSD/DCD 1 1 RSD/DCDDTR 4 4 DTRDSR 6 6 DSR1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-8Model SLN2006A MMI interface kitSMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors onopposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a nullmodem transformation between cables. This board can be used for25–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.SMotorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interfacethe CDMA LMF serial port connection to the GLI, CSM, ETIB board,and module debug serial ports.Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog The following communications system analyzers are supported by theLMF:SMotorola CyberTestSAdvantest R3465 Analyzer with R3561L Signal GeneratorSHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A/600 Analyzer including 83203BCDMA Interface, manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCSInterface for 1900 MHz BTSs.SHewlett Packard Model HP 8935 Analyzeror a combination of test equipment supported by the CDMA LMF andused during optimization and testing of the RF communications portionof BTS equipment.The analyzer provides the following functions:SFrequency counter.SDeviation meter.SRF power meter (average and code domain).SRF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation).SAudio signal generator.SAC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and highimpedance input mode).SNoise measurement meter.SC–Message filter.SSpectrum analyzer.SCDMA code domain analyzer.GPIB cablesHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used tointerconnect test equipment and CDMA LMF terminal.Power meterSHewlett Packard Model HP437B with HP8481A power sensor capableof measuring from –30 dBm to 20 dBm,or1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued08/01/2001 1-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSGigatronics 8542B power meter.Timing reference cablesSTwo Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; rightangle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. longare required to interconnect the communications system analyzer toSGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timing references,orSTwo BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,used to interconnect the communications system analyzer toSGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timingreferences in the RF Modem Frame.Digital multimeterFluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used forprecision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.Directional coupler Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model375BN–M loads, or equivalent.RF attenuatorsS20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunctionwith calibration of test cables or during general troubleshootingprocedures.S10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibrationwith a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.Clamp–on DC current probeAmprobe CT600, or equivalent, 600 amp capability with jaw size whichaccommodates 2/0 cable. Used with the DMM for back–up batterycharging testing.Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for varioustest setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) forcalibration and (1) RF short.RF load100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RFloading during BTS transmit tests.High–impedance conductive wrist strap Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD whenhandling or working with modules.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-10Driver bit for tamper–resistant fastenersTorx tamper–resistant insert bit set, Grainger 5F530 or equivalent, toremove tamper–resistant fasteners securing the frame rear access cover.Optional EquipmentThis section provides a list of additional equipment that might berequired during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.Not all optional equipment specified in this section will besupported by the CDMA LMF in automated tests.NOTEDuplexerFiltronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used duringSpectral Purity Receive band noise tests.Frequency counterStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if directmeasurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.Spectrum analyzerSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) orequivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive bandspectral purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed bythe CDMA LMF.LAN testerModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used tosupplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.Span line (T1/E1) verification equipmentAs required for the local application.RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTStransmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshootingprocedures.Oscilloscope Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.2–way splitterMini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide thediversity receive input to the BTS.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued08/01/2001 1-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to providetest transmission and reception during BTS maintenance andtroubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not featurespecial test modes. Two radios will be required for system anddrive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.RF circulatorCirculator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute fora duplexer during Receive sensitivity FER testing in conjunction withSafco CDMA mobile.High stability 10 MHz rubidium standardStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM andLFR/HSO frequency verification.1
Required Documents and Related PublicationsPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-1268P09253A60Required DocumentsThe following documents are required to perform optimization of thecell site equipment:SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), whichincludes:–General site information–Floor plan–RF power levels–Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)–Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)–Board placement–Site wiring list–Site–specific CDF fileSDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipmentRelated PublicationsAdditional, detailed information about the installation, operation, andmaintenance of the SC4812ET Lite BTS and its components is includedin the following publications:SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide; 68P64114A51SLMF Help functionSLMF CLI Reference; 68P09253A56SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93SSC4812ET Lite Installation; 68P09253A36SSC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Units; 68P09253A49SSC4812T/ET/ET Lite Troubleshooting; 68P09252A93SFrame Mounting Guide Analog/CDMA/TDMA; 68P09226A18SCellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95SM–PATHt T1 Channel Service Unit User’s Guide, ADC Kentroxpart number 65–77538101SM–PATHt E1 Channel Service Unit Installation Guide, ADCKentrox part number 1174662S2–Slot Universal Shelf Installation Guide, ADC Kentrox part number65–780700011
Terms and Abbreviations08/01/2001 1-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYStandard and Non–standardTerms and AbbreviationsStandard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined inCellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms; 68P09213A95. Anynon–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed inTable 1-1.Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and AbbreviationsTerm or Abbreviation DefinitionACLC AC Load Center. An SC4812ET Lite RF Base Transceiver Station (BTS)subassembly which provides the frame interface for external AC powerconnection and internal AC circuit control and protection.CCD Clock Combining and Distribution. SC4812–series BTS CDMA ChannelProcessor (CCP) shelf module which accepts timing signals from the activesource and distributes them to other CCP shelf modules.CIO Combiner Input/Output.DMAC Digital Metering, Alarm, Control. Part of the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) whichprovides control of and status information for the AC power rectifiers as well asback–up battery monitoring and test capability. Term is used interchangeably withMAP (see below).DRDC Duplexer, Receive Filter, Dual Directional Coupler. Provides duplexing of BTStransmit and receive signals to a single antenna and antenna signal sampling ineither the forward (transmit) or reflected (receive) direction for use by an RFDiagnostic Subsystem (RFDS).EMPC Expansion Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS expansion frame MPC modulewhich is used to receive, amplify, and distribute RX signals from the starter frameMPC.ETIB External Trunked Interface Board. Module providing status indicators and MMIinterface connections for LPAs in SC4812ET and SC4812ET Lite BTS frames.HSO High Stability Oscillator. Module providing backup timing source for a BTS whenthe timing signal from the GPS or RGPS module is unavailable.HSOX HSO Expansion. Module used in a BTS expansion frame to interface with thestarter frame HSO or LFR and distribute the timing signals to the expansion frameCSM modules.LPAC Linear Power Amplifier ControllerMAP Meter Alarm Panel. SC4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) whichcontains the functions of both the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) andthe DMAC. Term is used interchangeably with DMAC.MPC Multi–coupler Preselector Card. BTS CCP shelf module used to amplify anddistribute RX signals to BBX modules.PDA Power Distribution Assembly. Assembly in an SC4812ET Lite BTS providinginternal DC power distribution and circuit protection.. . . continued on next page1
Terms and Abbreviations – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-14Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and AbbreviationsTerm or Abbreviation DefinitionRGD Remote Global Positioning System (GPS) DistributionSCCP Small CDMA Channel Processor. The type of CCP shelf used in the SC4812ETLite BTS.test equipment set The CDMA LMF computer, communications test set, directional couplers,attenuators, termination loads, associated test cables, and adapters needed for thecomplete calibration and acceptance testing of a BTS. The test equipment set iscalibrated and maintained as a unit. When one component of a set is replaced, thecomplete set must be recallibrated to ensure measurement errors are notintroduced during BTS optimization and ATP.TCP Temperature Compensation Panel. A function of the SC4812ET Lite MAP whichprovides the capability to adjust DC voltage output of the rectifiers to compensatefor variations resulting from temperature changes.TRDC Transmit & Receive Dual Directional Coupler (Non–duplexed, Receive Filter).TRDCs contains separate transmit and receive paths and bandpass filters whichare not connected electrically. Transmit and receive antenna signals are notduplexed and must be handled by separate antennas. Each RF path contains a dualdirectional coupler on the antenna port which allows sampling of antenna signalsin the forward (transmit) and reflected (receive) directions for use by an RFDS. 1
BTS Equipment Identification08/01/2001 1-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYEquipment OverviewThe SC4812ET Lite BTS frame consists of a single, outdoor,weatherized cabinet containing RF and power components. The BTS isfunctionally similar to the two–cabinet SC4812ET, but provides moreflexibility in site selection because of its smaller footprint and lighterweight. The BTS is powered by 240 Vac, rectified internally to +27 Vdc,and can support up to two carriers in a 3–sector configuration. AnSC4812ET Lite starter frame with the maximum of one SC4812ET Liteexpansion frame can support a maximum of four carriers in a 3–sectorconfiguration. Six–sector operation is not supported with any SC4812ETLite configuration.The BTS frame houses the fan modules, RF compartment heatexchanger, Small CDMA Channel Processor shelf (SCCP), RF LinearPower Amplifier (LPA) modules, LPA trunking modules, bandpassfilters or 2:1 combiners, and Duplexer Directional Couplers (DRDC) orTriplexer Directional Couplers (TRDC). Power components include anAC Load Center (ACLC), rectifiers, a +27 Vdc Power DistributionAssembly (PDA), backup batteries, battery heaters, and one duplexGFCI 115 Vac utility outlet.Logical BTS NumberingAn SC4812ET Lite logical BTS can consist of up to two SC4812ET Liteframes. In a logical BTS, all frames located at a site are identified asparts of a single, numbered BTS (for example, BTS–812). Each frame isassigned a unique frame number. The first, or starter, frame of a logicalBTS has a –1 suffix (for example, BTS–812–1) and the second, orexpansion, frame of the logical BTS is numbered with the suffix, –101(e. g. BTS–812–101).Figure 1-1 shows the frame configuration for a logical BTS consisting oftwo SC4812ET Lite frames. The figure also shows the BTS–to–CBSCTranscoder and inter–frame span configurations which can be employedwith an SC4812ET Lite logical BTS.1
BTS Equipment Identification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-16Figure 1-1: SC4812ET Lite Logical BTS Span CablingBTSSPAN 1BTSSPAN 101TO XC TO XC(Optional)BTSSPAN 102(Optional)AB A BFrame 101(ExpansionFrame)Frame 1(StarterFrame)SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID NumbersAll Ethernet LAN–addressable modules in the logical BTS frames at asingle site are also identified with unique Device ID numbers dependentupon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to Table 1-2,Table 1-3, and Figure 1-5 for specific SCCP Shelf Device ID numbers.Table 1-2: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)Frame Module ID Number (Left to Right)#Power(PS–1) Power(PS–2) AMR–1GLI2–1MCC2 BBX2 BBX2–RMPC/EMPC–11– – 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 R1 –101 – – 101 101 101 102 101 102 103 R101 –Table 1-3: SCCP Cage Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)Frame Module ID Number (Left to Right)#HSO/LFR CSM–1CSM–2CCDACCDBAMR–2GLI2–2MCC2 BBX2 SW MPC/EMPC–21–1 2 – – – 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 – –101 –101 102 – – – 102 102 103 104 104 105 106 – –1
Cabinet Identification08/01/2001 1-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYMajor ComponentsFigure 1-2 illustrates the features of the BTS frame, the single majorcomponent of the Motorola SC4812ET Lite.Figure 1-2: SC4812ET Lite BTS FrameBattery Compartment Door(Can only be opened after Main Door is open) RF Interface PanelSCCP Shelf BackplaneRear Access PanelPower EntryandNetwork Interface CompartmentSC4812ETL0001–1Main Doorwith Heat Exchanger1
Internal Assembly Location and IdentificationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-18Internal Assemblies and FRUsFigure 1-3 shows the location of the internal assemblies and FieldReplaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is found inthe following paragraphs.Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity)LPAsSCCP FansLPA TrunkingModuleRFDSSCCP ShelfFilter/CombinerShelf (Bandpassfilters shown)ETIBDRDC/TRDCShelfCSU ShelfMAPRectifiersDC PDAGFCI UtilityOutletLPACBack–up Batteries(Heaters underneath batteries)ExternalBlowerAssemblySC4812ETL0002–4ACLCSpan I/OASpan I/OBCSUsESD GroundingJack1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued08/01/2001 1-191X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAC Load Center (ACLC)The ACLC is the frame entry point for AC power. It incorporates ACpower control, distribution, and surge protection (Figure 1-3).Back–up BatteriesThe batteries (Figure 1-3) provide +24 Vdc back–up for the frame shouldAC power be interrupted. The frame can accommodate a total of 12 12Vbatteries grouped in six strings. Each string consists of two batteriesconnected in series for 24 Vdc output. The six strings are connected inparallel to meet the current–draw requirements of the frame. Themaximum time duration of the back–up capability depends on systemconfiguration.Battery HeatersThe battery heater pads warm the batteries to provide improvedcold–weather performance. A separate heater pad is required for eachbattery string and is located between each battery string and itsrespective support shelf.Channel Service Units (CSU) (Optional)The SC4812ET Lite can be equipped with up to two M–PATH 537 CSUor two M–PATH 437 CSU modules which install in the CSU shelf(Figure 1-3). These modules allow monitoring of span performance andprovide capability for remote network management.CSU ShelfThe CSU shelf is an ADC Kentrox 2–slot Universal Shelf which canaccommodate two M–PATH 537 or two M–PATH 437 CSU modules.When the optional CSU modules are not installed, cover plates areinstalled over the CSU card slots (Figure 1-3).DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)Both rectifier output voltage and back–up battery voltage are routed tothe PDA (Figure 1-3) where they are combined into system DC busvoltage. The PDA provides distribution of DC power and system DCbus protection from the loads with MAIN BREAKER and the smallerpost–distribution circuit breakers. MAIN BREAKER permits removal ofall frame loading from the bus. The 13 post–distribution circuit breakerspermit removal of individual loads.Duplexer, Receive filter, Dual Directional Coupler (DRDC)DRDCs permit duplexing of sector transmit and receive signals on asingle antenna. The DRDCs also incorporate a receive bandpass filterand dual directional couplers which permit signal monitoring by the RFDiagnostic Subsystem.ET Interface Board (ETIB) and LPA Control (LPAC) BoardThe ETIB is an interconnect module with status LEDs, MMI recepticles,and secondary surge protection for the LPA modules. The LPAC boardprovides the interface for the LPA connections (Figure 1-3).1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-20Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1 Combiners)The filter/combiner shelf (Figure 1-3) holds the transmit bandpass filtersor 2:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.Heat ExchangerThe heat exchanger provides cooling to the frame RF compartment. Thefan speed of the heat exchanger adjusts automatically with temperature.The heat exchanger is located in the frame main door (Figure 1-2).PunchblockThe punchblock (Figure 1-4) is the interface between the frame and theT1/E1 span lines. It is located on the right–hand side of the power entrycompartment at the rear of the frame. The punchblock provides theinitial interconnection between the spans and the Customer–defined I/O,alarms, multi–frame timing source (RGPS and RHSO), and pilot beaconcontrol (optional).Figure 1-4: 50–Pair PunchblockSC4812ETL0024–1Rear of Frame(Power Entry CompartmentDoor Open)Section of Network Interface Panel(Rotated 30_ Right)50–PinPunchblock(Cabling notshown forclarity)1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued08/01/2001 1-211X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRectifiersThe rectifiers (Figure 1-3) convert AC power supplied to the frame to+27.4 Vdc which powers the frame and maintains the charge of theback–up batteries. Rectifier positions are numbered 1 through 4 from leftto right when facing the frame. Single–carrier frames are equipped withthree rectifiers installed in positions 1, 2, and 3. Two–carrier frames areequipped with four rectifiers. The number of rectifiers supplied witheach configuration provides N+1 redundancy.RF Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS)The RFDS (Figure 1-5) provides the capability for remotely monitoringthe status of the SC4812ET Lite transmit and receive paths. ForIS–95A/B operation, the RFDS is a COBRA model. To support 1Xoperation, the RFDS must the 1X–capable COBRA–II.Small CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) ShelfThe SCCP shelf has provisions for the following types and quantities ofmodules (Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-5):SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX–1X) cards, primary (6)SBBX2 or BBX–1X card, redundant (1)SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)SClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on two cards (one with GPSreceiver, if ordered)SCombiner Input/Output (CIO) card (1)SFan modules (2)SFiller panel (as required)SGroup Line Interface (GLI2) cards (2)SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO)/Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) card(Optional) (1)SMulti–coupler Preselector Cards (MPC3) (2)SMulti–Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24, or MCC–1X) cards (4)SPower supply cards (2)SSwitch card (1)1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-22FILLER POWER 1 POWER 2HSO/LFR CSM 1 CSM 2 CCD AMR GLI21 23 4MCC1 2 34 5 6BBX2 R1SWITCH121212MPCFILLER POWER 1 POWER 2HSO/LFR CSM 101 CSM 102 CCD AMR GLI2101 102MCC101 102 103BBX2 R101SWITCH10212MPC101 101102 103 104 104 105 106MPCCSMPower SupplyPower SupplyMPCCSMCCDCCDAMRHSOAMRGLI2 GLI2MCC8 E or MCC24BBX2BBX2BBX2BBX2BBX2BBX2SWITCH19mm Filler PanelBBX2CIOFRAME 1FRAME 101(Expansion Frame)MCC8 E or MCC24 MCC8 E or MCC24MCC8 E or MCC24Figure 1-5: SCCP Shelf, IS–95A/B and 1X DevicesSC4812ETL0003–4NOTES:1. MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s, orMCC–1Xx2. BBXx may be BBX2s or BBX–1XsSpan I/O BoardsThe two span I/O boards, Span I/O A and Span I/O B (Figure 1-3),provide the span line interface from the punchblock or the CSUmodules, if equipped, to the SCCP backplane.Transmit & receive, non–duplexed, Receive filter, DualDirectional Coupler (TRDC)TRDCs provide separate, bandpass–filtered sector transmit and receivepaths. When TRDCs are used separate transmit and receive antennas arerequired for each sector. As with DRDCs, TRDCs dual directionalcouplers for each antenna path which permit signal monitoring by theRFDS.1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued08/01/2001 1-231X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 1-6: RF Interface Panel, DRDCs InstalledTX INGROUND1231A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3BANTENNASREMOTE ASU12TX OUT123 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3BRX EXPANSIONSC4812ETL0018–2NOTE: Plugs are installedwhen TX IN combinersare not fitted.DUPLEXED TX &RX PORTSNOTES:1. CARRIER 1 TX/RXUSES ANTENNAPORTS 1A, 2A, 3A;RX DIVERSITYFROM PORTS 1B,2B, 3B.2. CARRIER 2 TX/RXUSES ANTENNAPORTS 1B, 2B, 3B;RX DIVERSITYFROM PORTS 1A,2A, 3A.1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-24Figure 1-7: RF Interface Panel, TRDCs InstalledGROUND1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3BREMOTE ASU1 2TX OUT1 2 3 1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3BRX EXPANSIONRX PORTSTX PORTSNOTES:1. CARRIER 1 TX USESTX PORTS 1A, 2A, 3A;CARRIER 1 RX USESRX PORTS 1A, 2A, 3A;CARRIER 1 RXDIVERSITY USES RXPORTS 1B, 2B, 3B2. CARRIER 2 TX USESTX PORTS 1B, 2B, 3B;CARRIER 2 RX USESRX PORTS 1B, 2B, 3B;CARRIER 2 RXDIVERSITY USES RXPORTS 1A, 2A, 3ASC4812ETL0019–2NOTE: Plugs are installedwhen TX IN combinersare not fitted.1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued08/01/2001 1-251X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 1-8: RFDS, DRDC, and TRDC DetailsBTSCPLDANTCPLDDRDCRFDSSC4812ETL0005–3TRDCTX BTSCPLDRX BTSCPLDTX ANTCPLDRX ANTCPLDTXRXDUPLEXEDTX & RX ANTENNATXANTENNARXANTENNATXRX1A1B 2A2B3B 3ADRDC/TRDCANTENNA CONNECTORASSIGNMENTS1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-26SCCP Cage Configuration andthe 1X DevicesSC4812ET Lite frames have one SCCP cage which will support up to 4MCC cards and 6 BBX cards.MCC CardsA BTS may be configured with a mix of MCC–8E, MCC–24, andMCC–1X cards. Any MCC card slot will support any of the three MCCtypes. For 1X capability under R16.0, at least one MCC card must be anMCC–1X which can be installed in any MCC card slot.BBX CardsUp to 6 BBX cards of mixed BBX2s and BBX–1Xs can also besupported. BBX card slots 1 through 6 are carrier– andsector–dependent. As a result, the BBX slots dedicated to the sectors forone carrier should be populated with the same type of cards. Refer toTable 1-5 for BBX card slot carrier and sector correlations.The BBX–R1 card slot is dedicated to the redundant BBX. This slot willsupport either a BBX2 or a BBX–1X. If a cage has BBX–1X carriers,the redundant BBX (BBXR) must be a BBX–1X card to provide 1Xredundancy support.1
BTS Sector Configurations08/01/2001 1-271X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSector ConfigurationThere are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also seeTable 1-5 and Figure 1-9. Bandpass filters are used for single–carrierconfigurations and two–carrier systems when carriers are either adjacentor not adjacentTable 1-4: BTS Sector ConfigurationNumber ofCarriers Number ofSectors Channel Spacing Filter/Combiner Requirements1 3 N/A Bandpass Filter2 3 Adjacent orNon–adjacent Bandpass FilterThe matrix in Table 1-5 shows the correlation between the various sectorconfigurations and BBX cards.1
BTS Sector Configurations – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20011-28Table 1-5: Sector ConfigurationsConfiguration Description3–Sector / 1 CarrierThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for a 3–sector/1–carrier frame.ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3B1TX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A RX1B RX2B RX3B Carrier #BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 BBX2–1(diversityRX)BBX2–2(diversityRX)BBX2–3(diversityRX)13–Sector / 2–ADJACENT or 2–NON–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for bothadjacent and non–adjacent channels.ANT 1A ANT 2A ANT 3A ANT 1B ANT 2B ANT 3BTX1 / RX1A TX2 / RX2A TX3 / RX3A TX4 / RX1B TX5 / RX2B TX6 / RX3B Carrier #2BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 BBX2–1(diversityRX)BBX2–2(diversityRX)BBX2–3(diversityRX)1BBX2–4(RX) BBX2–5(RX) BBX2–6(RX) BBX2–4(TX &diversityRX)BBX2–5(TX &diversityRX)BBX2–6(TX &diversityRX)2Figure 1-9: SC4812ET Lite LPA Configuration with Bandpass Filters(Starter Frame Mapping Only)Table 1-5Configuration Numbers 1 and 23–SectorBandpass FiltersCARRIER 1SECTOR 1, 2, 3CARRIER 2SECTOR 1, 2, 3SC4812ETL0011–31
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 2: Preliminary OperationsTable of ContentsPreliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cellsite Types 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame SCCP Configuration Switch 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN Termination 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power Up 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Tools 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Inspection and Setup 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power System Pre-Power Application Test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External AC Power Connection Verification 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying AC Power 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Application and Testing 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Discharge Test 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Removal Procedure 2-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Notes2
Preliminary Operations: Overview08/01/2001 2-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThis section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifyingmodule placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switchsettings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTSapplication. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures arepresented.Cellsite TypesSites are configured as 3–sector with one or two carriers. Each type hasunique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.CDFThe Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage datainformation and passes it directly to the CDMA Local MaintenanceFacility (LMF) during optimization. The number of BTS frames, BBX2and MCC24 boards, and linear power amplifier assignments are some ofthe equipage data included in the CDF.Site Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the frame.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placedon a conductive surface or back into the anti–static bag itwas shipped in.CAUTIONInitial Installation ofBoards/ModulesTable 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and, if it was not previously done, slide all boards and modules intothe appropriate shelves as required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.2
Preliminary Operations: Overview – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-2Setting Frame SCCPConfiguration SwitchThe backplane configuration switch is located behind the frame rearaccess panel. It must be set for the frame type as shown in Figure 2-1.The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to theBTS equipment.Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch SettingsSC4812ETL0022–1ONOFFSTARTERFRAME SETTING(FRAME 1)ONOFFBOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0EXPANSIONFRAME SETTING(FRAME 101)REAR ACCESSPANELT–27 BUTTON HEAD ORT–30 PAN HEADTAMPER–RESISTANTFASTENER (14)2
Ethernet LAN08/01/2001 2-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYEthernet LAN TerminationFor proper operation, each end of the primary and redundant BTSEthernet Local Area Networks (LAN) must be terminated with a50–ohm load. For a BTS consisting of a single frame, this is done byplacing 50–ohm triaxial terminations on the LAN A and B external INand OUT connectors located in the power entry compartment(Figure 2-2). When the LAN links multiple frames in a logical BTS, the50–ohm triaxial terminations must be installed on all uncabled LAN Aand B external connectors on each frame.Check the LAN A and B external IN and OUT connectors in the powerentry compartment of each frame, and be sure terminations are installedon all the uncabled external LAN connectors.Figure 2-2: External Ethernet LAN ConnectorsSC4812ETL0024–2Rear of Frame(Power Entry CompartmentDoor Open)Section of Network Interface Panel(Rotated 30_ Right)LAN A OUTLAN B OUTLAN A INLAN B IN2
Initial Power UpPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-4IntroductionThe following information is used to check for any electrical shortcircuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cell site andBTS power supply units before applying power for the first time. Itcontains instructional information on the proper initial power upprocedures for the SC4812ET Lite for both the North American versionand the International version. If directions are different for either version,they are called out within the procedure. Please pay attention to allcautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury topersonnel.Required ToolsThe following tools are used in the procedures.SClamp–on DC current probe (600 amp capability with jaw size toaccommodate 2/0 cable).SDigital Multimeter (DMM) with standard 2mm (.080”) tip probesSHot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)Cabling InspectionUsing the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SReceive RF cabling – up to six RX cablesSTransmit RF cabling – up to six TX cablesFor DC power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable is black. (The black powercable is at ground potential.)IMPORTANT*Initial Inspection and SetupEnsure all battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) forunused battery positions are off (pulled out) before andduring the entire power up process. Leave these breakers inthe off position when leaving the site.CAUTIONTable 2-2: Initial Inspection and SetupStep Action1Be sure that the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC power supplied to the frame is set toOFF.2Be sure that all AC Load Center (ACLC), all DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA), and all batteryshelf circuit breakers are turned OFF.. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 2-2: Initial Inspection and SetupStep Action3Confirm that the Meter Alarm Panel (MAP) POWER switch and all LEDs (Figure 2-9) are OFF. Ifany LEDs are lighted, re–check and turn OFF all battery shelf circuit breakers.4If a heat source was placed in the RF compartment to prevent condensation prior to BTS power–up,turn off the heat source and remove it and any associated cabling from the BTS before proceeding.5Confirm that the external 220 Vac supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input by performing theprocedure in Table 2-4. Figure 2-3: Frame Power Subassemblies, North American andInternational CabinetsLPAsSCCP FansRFDSSCCP ShelfETIBMeter AlarmPanel (MAP)With TCUAC RectifiersDC PDABackup Batteries(Heaters underneath batteries)External BlowerAssemblySC4812ETL0002–3Battery ShelfCircuit Breakers(Between Bus Barand Cabinet Wall)UtilityOutletACLC Circuit BreakerAccess DoorNOTE:GFCI capability is built into the Utility Outlet of the North American Cabinet.GFCI capability is built into the circuit breakers of the International Cabinet2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-6Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – North AmericanLEDsSC4812ETL0008–1ATTENTIONCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSRECT. 1/3 RECT. 2/4 GFIHEATERMAINATTENTIONCAUTIONLIVE TERMINALSFigure 2-5: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel – InternationalLEDsRECT 1/3 RECT 2/4 MAIN HEATER GFIJOCYLNELECTRONIC SYSTEMS2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 2-6: DC PDASC4812ETL0009–3LPA1B 1D 3B 3D1A 1C 3A 3C PS1 PS2ETIBOPTIONS25 25HEAT EXCHANGERCAUTIONSHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERSONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGERMAINTENANCE OR REPAIRLPABLOWERSPUSH BUTTONTO RESETLPA BLOWERSMAIN BREAKER30050 5010 1530 30 30 30 15PILOTBEACONDC Power System Pre-PowerApplication Test Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure inTable 2-3 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distributionsystem.The procedure in Table 2-3 is required only on initial BTSpower–up or following maintenance when any majorpower components (e.g., ACLC, DC PDA, Meter AlarmPanel) were replaced or internal DC power cables weredisconnected.NOTETable 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application TestStep Action1Physically verify all ACLC front–panel circuit breakers (Figure 2-4) are OFF (down), all DC PDAcircuit breakers (Figure 2-6) are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuit breakers(Figure 2-3) are OFF (pulled out).2Visually ensure that all AC rectifier modules (Figure 2-3) are not powered (DC, PWR, and bar graphLEDs are not lighted), that the MAP power switch (Figure 2-9) is OFF, and that no LEDs on theMAP are lighted.3Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery busbars. There should be no 27 Vdc present.. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-8Table 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application TestStep Action4* IMPORTANTDo not unseat the AC rectifier modules in the following step.Perform the following:SIn the frame RF compartment, unseat all circuit boards/ modules (except CCD and CIO cards) in theSCCP shelf, but leave them in their respective slots.SIn the frame LPA compartment, disconnect the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) cables from thecompartment bulkhead feed through connector.5Set the DMM to measure resistance, and inside the battery compartment, measure the resistancebetween the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars. The resistance should measure > 1 ΜΩ.6Leave the DMM set to measure resistance, and insert the probes into the MAP VOLT and AMP TESTPOINTS (Figure 2-9). Place the (+) DMM probe into the (–) AMP TEST POINT. Place the (–) DMMprobe into the (–) VOLT TEST POINT. Resistance should measure greater than 750 Ω.7On the DC PDA, set the MAIN BREAKER to the ON position by pushing it in. Resistance betweenthe MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT should measure between 300 Ω.minimum 900 Ω. maximum.8Before proceeding, be sure the SCCP shelf power/converter modules PS1 and PS2 are correct byverifying that the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:– (in +27 volt systems)! CAUTIONUsing the incorrect type of power/converter modules will damage the module, the SCCP shelf, andother modules installed in the SCCP shelf.9* IMPORTANTIn the following steps, if the DMM reads between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω maximum afterinserting any board/module, a low impedance problem probably exists in that board/module. Replacethe suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the problem before proceeding.Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and and turn ON the PS1 DC circuitbreaker on the DC PDA.10 Resistance between the MAP (–) VOLT TEST POINT and the (–) AMP TEST POINT shouldtypically increase as capacitors charge, finally measuring between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω.maximum.11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for the PS2 converter module/circuit breaker and all other remaining modules inthe SCCP shelf.12 On the DC PDA, set the LPA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeatstep 10.13 Repeat step 12 for each of the three remaining LPA circuit breakers.. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 2-3: DC Power System Pre–Power Application TestStep Action14 Carefully reconnect each LPA cable one at a time. Repeat step 10 after reconnecting each cable.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as module input capacitorscharge, finally indicating between 300 Ω minimum and 900 Ω. maximum.15 Set the Pilot Beacon, both Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.Repeat step 10 after pushing in each circuit breaker.16 Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out). Failure to properly connect the external AC power cablewill damage the surge protection module inside the ACLC.CAUTIONExternal AC Power ConnectionVerificationFollowing verification of frame DC power system integrity, external ACpower connections must be verified. To accomplish this, the series of ACvoltage measurements specified in Table 2-4 is required.Table 2-4: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action1NOTEThis procedure is required only after external AC power wiring has been initially connected orremoved and reconnected to the frame.n WARNINGEnsure the frame is unpowered by setting the facility circuit breaker controlling external AC powersupplied to the frame to OFF.Physically verify all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), and all battery shelf circuitbreakers are OFF (pulled out).2Open the ACLC circuit breaker access door, and set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down).3Remove the four screws securing the ACLC front panel assembly, and remove the ACLC front panelassembly to gain access to the AC circuit breaker input terminals (Figure 2-8).4Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON.. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-10Table 2-4: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action5! CAUTIONNorth AMERICAN Cabinet only:If the AC voltages measured in the following steps exceed 120 V when measuring from terminals L1or L2 to neutral or ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of the higher voltages aredetermined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on theinputs.Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral.North American Cabinet:SVoltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.International Cabinet:SVoltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.6Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground.North American Cabinet:SVoltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.International Cabinet:SVoltage should be in the nominal range of 210 to 240 Vac.7Steps 7a through 7c apply to the North American cabinet only. If working on a International cabinetcontinue to step 8.7a Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral on the North American cabinet.SVoltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.7b Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground on the North American cabinet.SVoltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to 120 Vac.7c ! CAUTIONIf the AC voltages measured (on the North American cabinet) in the following step exceeds 240 Vwhen measuring between terminals L1 and L2, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause of thehigher voltages are determined. The frame will be damaged if the Main breaker is turned on withexcessive voltage on the inputs.Measure from terminal L1 to terminal L2.SVoltage should be in the nominal range from 208 to 240 Vac.8Remove external AC power from the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to OFF.9Install the ACLC front panel assembly and secure with the four screws removed in step 1.10 Apply external AC power to the frame by setting the facility circuit breaker to ON. 2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 2-7: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – North AmericanG= GroundN = NeutralL1 = Line 1L2 = Line 2GNL2 L1(ACLC front panel assemblyremoved.)2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-12Figure 2-8: ACLC Voltage Measurement Probe Points – InternationalG= GroundN = NeutralL1 = Line 1GNL1(ACLC front panel assemblyremoved.)Applying AC PowerOnce the external AC power connections are verified, AC power may beapplied internally to the frame. Table 2-5 provides the procedure forapplying internal AC power.Table 2-5: Applying Internal AC PowerStep Action1Be sure the requirements of Table 2-4 for AC input power connection verification have been met.2Be sure all DC PDA circuit breakers are set to OFF (pulled out), all ACLC front–panel circuitbreakers are OFF (down), and all battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 2-5: Applying Internal AC PowerStep Action3Be sure the MAP power switch, TCP switch, and BATT TEST switch are all set to OFF.4If it has not already been done, set the facility circuit breaker supplying AC power to the frame to ON.5Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker ON.SFor the North American cabinet:Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (Figure 2-4).SFor the International cabinet:Observe that all four (4) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (Figure 2-4).6On the ACLC, set RECT. 1/3 and RECT. 2/4 branch circuit breakers ON. All the installed rectifiermodules (Figure 2-3) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.7Set the MAP power switch to ON. The MAP VOLT display should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC with theTCP switch OFF.! CAUTIONOnce power is applied to the MAP, be careful not to short either of the VOLT TEST POINTS toground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.8On the MAP, set the TCP switch (Figure 2-9) to ON. Verify no alarm LEDs are lighted on the MAP.NOTEDepending on battery compartment temperature, the rectifier voltage displayed on the MAP VOLTindicator may change by as much as +1.5 V when the TCP is set to on.9Check the rectifier current bar graph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). Noneshould be lighted at this time.10 If batteries are fitted, set the ACLC HEATER circuit breaker to ON.NOTEThe GFCI AC circuit breaker should remain OFF unless the GFCI outlet is in use. Figure 2-9: Meter Alarm Panel (MAP)POWERSWITCHPOWERINDICATORTCPSWITCH VOLT TESTPOINTS25_C SETMASTERVOLTAGEADJ.BATT TESTSWITCHSC4812ETL0015–2TO DISABLESENSOR FAILSENSOR 2SENSOR 1COMM2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-14DC Power Application andTestingTable 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for applying DC power andensuring the DC power system components are correctly functioning.Table 2-6: DC Power Application and TestsStep Action1Be sure all DC PDA and battery shelf circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).2Be sure the procedures in Table 2-3 (if applicable) and Table 2-5 have been performed.3! CAUTIONWhen measuring voltage at the VOLT TEST POINTS, be careful not to short either of the test pointsto ground. Failure to comply will result in severe damage to the MAP.Measure voltage at the MAP VOLT TEST POINTS while pressing the 25° C SET button(Figure 2-9). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust with the MASTER VOLTAGE ADJ. onthe MAP, if necessary, to obtain an indicated 27.4+0.2 Vdc. Release the 25° C SET button.4Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 Vcompared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it iswarmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.5Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the cable connection point at the bottomof the + (red) battery bus bar and chassis ground, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltageshould be the same as the measurement in step 4.6Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage shouldmeasure the same as in step 4.7Close (push in) DC PDA MAIN BREAKER.8On the DC PDA(Figure 2-6), set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to the ON position by pushingthem in one at a time while observing the rectifier output current indicated on the MAP AMP display.–The display should indicate between 20 and 60 amps.9On the DC PDA), set the remaining circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at atime in the following sequence:SLPA circuit breakers (four breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 3C–3D).SHEAT EXCHANGER circuit breakers (two breakers)SETIB circuit breakerSPILOT BEACON circuit breakerSOPTION circuit breaker. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 2-6: DC Power Application and TestsStep Action10 Confirm that the MAP AMP display continues to indicate between 20 and 60 amps during the initialpower application.NOTENo battery charging or heavy RF loading is present at this point.11 If the frame is not equipped with the pilot beacon option, set the PILOT BEACON circuit breaker to OFF. Battery Charge Test(Connected Batteries)Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the batterycharging performance.Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Step Action1Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) for connected batteries only. This process shouldbe completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings drawing excess charge currentNOTEIf the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individuallydue to the surge current. If this condition occurs, disconnect the batteries from the 27Vdc bus bysetting the MAP power switch to OFF, and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers.The MAP power switch should then be turned ON.2Using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM, measure the current in each of the battery stringconnections to the battery bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quicklyreduce in a few minutes if the batteries have a typical new–battery charge level.NOTEThe MAP AMP display will indicate the total current output of the rectifiers during this procedure.As an alternative, the bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate ofthe total battery charge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LED elements torepresent the output current. Each illuminated LED element indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8or 8.75 Amps) of an individual rectifier’s maximum current output (70 Amps) is flowing.RECTIFIER BAR GRAPH EXAMPLE:Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bar graph LED elementsilluminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?Answer: Each bar graph is indicating approximately 12.5% of 70 amps, therefore, 3 x 8.75 equals26.25 amps per rectifier. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 x 26.25 A)78.75 amps.This charge current calculation is only valid when the RF and LPA compartment electronics are notpowered on, and the RF compartment heat exchanger is turned off. This can only be accomplished ifthe DC PDA MAIN BREAKER is set to OFF.. . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-16Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Step Action3The current in each string should be approximately equal (within + 5 amps).4Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any furtheraction. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the currentin each string should reduce to less than 5 amps.5Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the frame DCPower Application and Test (Table 2-6).NOTEIf discharged batteries are installed, the MAP AMP display may indicate approximately 288 amps fora two–carrier frame (four rectifiers) or 216 amps for a single–carrier frame (three rectifiers).Alternately, all bar graph elements may be lighted on the rectifiers during the charge test. Eitherindication shows that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries. It isrecommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the above stepbefore commissioning the site. This could take several hours. Battery Discharge TestPerform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current isless than 5 Amps per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures forchecking current levels.Table 2-8: Battery Discharge TestStep Action1Turn the BATT TEST switch on the MAP ON (Figure 2-9). The rectifier output voltage and currentshould decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarms for the MAP mayoccur.2Measure the individual battery string current using the clamp–on DC current probe and DMM. Thebattery discharge current in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 amps).3Turn BATT TEST switch OFF. Failure to turn off the MAP BATT TEST switch beforeleaving the site will result in low battery capacity andreduce battery life.CAUTION2
Initial Power Up – continued08/01/2001 2-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPower Removal ProcedureIf it becomes necessary to remove power from the frame, follow theprocedure in Table 2-9.Table 2-9: Power RemovalStep Action1Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out) in the following sequence:–LPAs–Pilot beacon–Heat exchanger–ETIB–Options–PS1 and PS2–MAIN BREAKER #1 (Internal)2n WARNINGThe surge capacitors in the DC PDA will store a large electrical charge for long periods of time.Failure to discharge these capacitors as specified in this step could result in serious personal injury ordamage to equipment.On the DC PDA, set the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to ON (pushed in), and wait at least 30seconds.3Set the DC PDA PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers to OFF.4Set the MAP power switch to OFF.5Set all ACLC circuit breakers to OFF (down) in the following sequence:–GFI–HEATER–RECT. 1/3–RECT. 2/4–MAIN6Set the facility circuit breaker controlling external power to the frame to OFF. 2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20012-18CoreHeat ExchangerAssemblyBlowerPowerCordBottom (Ambient) BlowerFan ModuleT–30 ScrewMountingBracketFigure 2-10: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and CircuitBreakersDC PDAMountingBracketT–30 ScrewTop (Internal) BlowerFan ModuleBlowerPowerCordOUT=OFFIN=ONHeat ExchangerBlower AssemblyCircuit BreakerSide View SC4812ETL0016–3LPA1B 1D 3B 3D1A 1C 3A 3C PS1 PS2ETIBOPTIONS25 25HEAT EXCHANGERCAUTIONSHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERSONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGERMAINTENANCE OR REPAIRLPABLOWERSPUSH BUTTONTO RESETLPA BLOWERSMAIN BREAKER30050 5010 1530 30 30 30 15PILOTBEACON2
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 3: Optimization/CalibrationTable of ContentsOptimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process Overview 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Types 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Data File (CDF) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF Site Equipage Verification 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Release Software Download 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Installation and Update Procedures 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folder Structure Overview 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wlmf Folder 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cdma Folder 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bts–nnn Folders 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bts–nnn.cal File 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bts–nnn.cdf File 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cbsc File 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . loads Folder 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . version Folder 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . code Folder 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data Folder 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Interface 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Optional Channel Service Units 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CDMA LMF 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic CDMA LMF Operation 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA LMF and Logical BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Into a BTS 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Logging Out 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Help 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the BTS 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . Select CSM Clock Source 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable CSMs 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) System Time 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Frequency Verification 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-56. . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-57. . Calibrating Test Equipment 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables – Overview 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Cable Loss Values 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Calibrate BLOs 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Calibration 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Path Calibration 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continued08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBLO Calibration Data File 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Calibration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration Test 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Audit 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Description 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Parameter Settings 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM 3-78. . Valid NAM Ranges 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Antenna Map Data 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program TSU NAM 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Testing 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Reporting Display 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Testing Set–up 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Exchanger Alarm Test 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Fail Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Alarms 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Rectifier Failure (Four Rectifier System) 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Rectifier Failure (Four Rectifier System) 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the site 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Notes3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction08/01/2001 3-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThis chapter provides procedures for downloading system operatingsoftware, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM referenceverification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.IMPORTANT*Optimization Process OverviewAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, suchas power up, have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrateand optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process consists of thefollowing:SDownload MGLI2 (GLI2–<bts#>–1) with application code and dataand then enable MGLI2.SUse the CDMA LMF status function and verify that all of the installeddevices of the following types respond with status information:CSM2, BBX2, GLI2, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If adevice is installed and powered up but is not responding and iscolored gray in the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDFfile. The CDF file will have to be corrected before the device can beaccessed by CDMA LMF.SDownload device application code and data to all devices of thefollowing types:–CSM2–BBX2–Remaining GLI2 (GLI2–<bts#>–2)–MCCSDownload the RFDS TSIC (if installed).SVerify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.SEnable the following devices (in the order listed):–Secondary CSM (slot 2)–Primary CSM (slot 1)–All MCCsSUsing the CDMA LMF test equipment selection function, select thetest equipment to be used for the calibration.SCalibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for theoptimization/calibration. Cable calibration values can be enteredmanually, if required.SConnect the required test equipment for a full optimization.3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-2SSelect all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the fulloptimization function. The full optimization function performs TXcalibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX testsfor all selected devices.SIf the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failedpaths.SIf the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused thefailure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.SIf the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passesfor a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem thatcaused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TXand RX tests have passed for all paths.Cell Site TypesSites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each typehas unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.Cell Site Data File (CDF)Before using the CDMA LMF for optimization/ATP, thecorrect bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files for the BTS must beobtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–# folder in theLMF. Failure to use the correct CDF files can causeunreliable or improper site operation. Failure to use thecorrect CDF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) sitecan shut down the site.IMPORTANT* The CDF includes the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSSCCP shelf allocation plan–BBX2 equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy–CSM equipage including redundancy–Multi Channel Card 24 or 8E (MCC24 or MCC8E) channel elementallocation plan. This plan indicates how the SCCP shelf isconfigured, and how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and accesschannel elements (and associated gain values) are assigned amongthe (up to 4) MCC24s or MCC8Es in the shelf.SCSM equipage including redundancySEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, theantenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued08/01/2001 3-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYantenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the requiredpower at the frame antenna connections. The corresponding BBX2output level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sectorcan then be determined based on Bay Level Offset (BLO) datadetermined during the optimization process.Refer to the Figure 3-1 and the LMF Help function foradditional information on the layout of the LMF directorystructure (including CDF file locations and formats).NOTEThe CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatteddiskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp), if the LMF computerhas ftp capability. Refer to the LMF Help function, and the LMF Helpfunction, for more information.CDF Site Equipage VerificationIf it has not already been done, review and verify the site equipage datain the CDF with the actual site hardware and the site engineeringdocumentation. Use a text editor to view the CDF contents.Use extreme care not to make any changes to the CDFcontent while viewing the file. Changes to the CDF cancause the site to operate unreliably or render it incapable ofoperation.CAUTIONAlways wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removaland installation of any card/module. After removal, thecard/module should be placed on a conductive surface orback into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.CAUTIONBTS System Release SoftwareDownloadThe System Release software (for example R2.15.x.x) being used by theBase Station System (BSS) must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. Deviceinitialization code is normally downloaded to the processor boards fromthe CBSC. Device application code and data is loaded from the CDMALMF computer terminal.3
Preparing the LMFPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-4OverviewBefore optimization can be performed, the CDMA LMF must beinstalled and configured on a computer platform meetingMotorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipmentand Software in Chapter 1).For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, thecomputer platform must be configured to display morethan 256 colors. See the operating system softwareinstructions for verifying and configuring the displaysettings.IMPORTANT*Software and files for installing and updating the CDMA LMF areprovided on CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:SCDMA LMF Program on CD ROMSCDMA LMF Binaries on CD ROMSConfiguration Data File (CDF) for each supported BTS (on floppydisk)SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk)The following section provides information and instructions forinstalling and updating CDMA LMF software and files.LMF Installation and Update ProceduresFirst Time Installation Sequence:1. Install Java Runtime Environment (JRE)2. Install U/WIN K–shell emulator3. Install LMF software4. Install BTS Binaries5. Install/create BTS foldersNOTEFollow the procedure in Table 3-1 to:1. Install the CDMA LMF program using the CDMA LMF CD ROM2. Install binary files using the CDMA LMF CD ROMTable 3-1: CD ROM InstallationnStep Action1Insert the CDMA LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive.SIf the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.SIf the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.2Click on the Start button3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-1: CD ROM InstallationnActionStep3 Select Run.4 Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.NOTE(If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.)5Follow the directions displayed in the Setup screen.Copy CBSC CDF Files to theLMF ComputerBefore logging on to a BTS with the CDMA LMF computer to executeoptimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf andcbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained from the CBSC and put in abts-# folder in the CDMA LMF computer. This requires creatingversions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy disketteand using the diskette to install the CDF files on the CDMA LMFcomputer.When copying CDF files, comply with the following toprevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:SThe numbers used in the bts-#.cdf andcbsc-#.cdf filenames must correspond to thelocally–assigned numbers for each BTS and itscontrolling CBSC.SThe generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the WindowsLMF will work with locally numbered BTS CDF files.Using this file will not provide a valid optimizationunless the generic file is edited to replace defaultparameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the operationalparameters used locally.IMPORTANT*The procedure in Table 3-2 lists the steps required to transfer the CDFfiles from the CBSC to the CDMA LMF computer. For any furtherinformation, refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola partno. 68P64114A21) or the CDMA LMF Help screen.Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF ComputerStep Action1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-6Table 3-2: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF ComputerStep Action4 Type mount and press the Enter key.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files onthe diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename> (e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, usethe Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows texteditor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on theCDMA LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# which must be supported by the CDMA LMF computer.9When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.12 Insert the diskette containing the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files into the CDMA LMF computer.13 Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the wlmf\cdma directory for eachbts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.14 Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the cbsc–#.cdf and bts–#.cdf files from the diskette to thecorresponding wlmf\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13. 3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCreating a NamedHyperTerminal Connection forMMI CommunicationConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FieldReplaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communicationsession between the CDMA LMF computer and the FRU. Using featuresof the Windows operating system, the connection properties for an MMIsession can be saved on the CDMA LMF computer as a named WindowsHyperTerminal connection. This eliminates the need for setting upconnection parameters each time an MMI session is required to supportoptimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedures in Table 3-3 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs > Accessories2 Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on theHypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on theClose button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:–Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,–Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and–Click OK.NOTEFor CDMA LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as testequipment and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to preventconflicts.4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select Direct to Com 1 or Directto Com 2 for the RS–232 connection port, and click OK.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-8Table 3-3: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File > Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File > Exit9Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.10 If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open, proceed to step 12.11 Select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop.16 Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:File > Close 3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFolder Structure OverviewThe CDMA LMF uses a wlmf folder that contains all of the essentialdata for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following list outlinesthe folder structure for CDMA LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,these folders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation.Figure 3-1: CDMA LMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)loads folder(C:)wlmf foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderBTS–nnn folders (A separate folder isrequired for each BTS where bts–nnn is theunique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)wlmf FolderThe wlmf folder contains the CDMA LMF program files.cdma FolderThe cdma folder contains the bts–nnn folders and the loads folder. It alsocontains a default cbsc–1.cdf file that can be copied to a bts–nnn folderfor use, if one cannot be obtained from the CBSC (Centralized BaseStation Controller) when needed.bts–nnn FoldersEach bts–nnn folder contains a CAL file, a CDF file and a cbsc file forthe BTS. Other files required by CDMA LMF may also be located in thebts–nnn folder. A bts–nnn folder must be created for each BTS that is tobe logged in to. The bts–nnn folder must be correctly named (forexample: bts–273) and must be placed in the cdma folder. Figure 3-2shows an example of the file naming syntax for a BTS folder.3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-10Figure 3-2: BTS Folder Name Syntax Examplebts–259BTS Numberbts–nnn.cal FileThe CAL (Calibration) file contains the bay level offset data (BLO) thatis used for BLO downloads to the BBX devices. The CAL file isautomatically created and updated by the CDMA LMF when TXcalibration is performed. Figure 3-3 details the file name syntax for theCAL file.Figure 3-3: CAL File Name Syntax Examplebts–259.calBTS Numberbts–nnn.cdf FileThe CDF file contains data that defines the BTS and data that is used todownload data to the devices. A CDF file must be placed in theapplicable BTS folder before the CDMA LMF can be used to log intothat BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using afloppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if theCDMA LMF computer has that capability. Figure 3-4 details the filename syntax for the CDF file.Figure 3-4: CDF Name Syntax Examplebts–259.cdfBTS Number3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYcbsc FileThe cbsc–#.cdf (Centralized Base Station Controller) file contains datafor the BTS. If one is not obtained from the CBSC, a copy of the defaultcbsc–1.cdf file located in the cdma folder can be used.Using the generic cbsc–1.cdf file will not provide a validoptimization unless the generic file is edited to replacedefault parameters with local operational parameters (e.g.,CDMA channel numbers must be changed from the default“384” to those used locally by the BTS).IMPORTANT*loads FolderThe loads folder contains the version folder(s). It does not contain anyfiles.version FolderThe version folder(s) contains the code and data folders. It does notcontain any files. The name of version folders is the software versionnumber of the code files that are included in its code folder. Versionfolders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation and CDMALMF updates. Each time the CDMA LMF is updated, another versionfolder will be created with the number of the software version for thecode files being installed.code FolderThe code folder contains the binary files used to load code into thedevices. A unique binary code file is required for each device type in theBTS to be supported with the CDMA LMF. Current version code filesfor each supported device created in this folder from the CDMA LMFCD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation/update process.Figure 3-5 shows an example of the file naming syntax for a code loadfile.3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-12Figure 3-5: Code Load File Name Syntax Examplebbx_ram.bin.0600Device Type Hardware bin numberIf this number matchesthe bin number of thedevice, the code file willautomatically be usedfor the download*GLI=0100LCI=0300MCC=0C00BBX=0600BDC=0700CSM=0800TSU=0900LPAC=0B00MAWI=0D00The device bin number can be determined by using the Statusfunction after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have abin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.*If a code file with the correct version and bin numbers is not found, a fileselection window will appear.data FolderThe data folder contains a DDS (Device Definition Structure) data filefor each supported device type. The DDS files are used to specify theCDF file data that is used to download data to a device. Current versionDDS files for each supported device type are created in this folder fromthe CDMA LMF CD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation orupdate process. Figure 3-6 shows an example of the file naming syntaxfor a code load file.3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 3-6: DDS File Name Syntax Examplecsm.dds.0800Device Type Device Bin Type NumberIf this number matches the binnumber of the device, the DDS filewill automatically be used for thedownload*GLI=0100LCI=0300MCC=0C00BBX=0600BDC=0700CSM=0800TSU=0900LPAC=0B00The device bin number can be determined by using the Statusfunction after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have abin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.*3
Span Lines – Interface and IsolationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-14T1/E1 Span InterfaceAt active sites, the OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTSand place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove thespan line cable conectors until the OMC–R/CBSC hasdisabled the BTS.IMPORTANT*Each frame is equipped with one 50–pair punchblock for spans,customer alarms, remote GPS, and BTS frame alarms. See Figure 3-9and refer to Table 3-5 for the physical location and punchdown locationinformation.Before connecting the LMF computer to the frame LAN, theOMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow theLMF to control the BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertentlysending control information to the BTS during LMF–based tests.Isolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansOnce the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the spans must bedisabled to ensure the LMF will maintain control of the BTS. To disablethe spans, disconnect the cable connector for the BTS–to–CBSCTranscoder span at the Span I/O card (Figure 3-7).If the BTS is a multi–frame logical BTS, do not disconnectthe inter–frame span.IMPORTANT*Figure 3-7: Disconnecting Span Lines Span Line CableConnectors4812ETL0020–13
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued08/01/2001 3-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYT1/E1 Span IsolationTable 3-4 describes the action required for span isolation.Table 3-4: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1Have the OMCR/CBSC place the BTS OOS.2To disable the span lines, locate the connector for the span or spans which must be disabled andremove the respective connector from the applicable SCCP cage Span I/O board (Figure 3-7).Configure Optional ChannelService UnitsThe M–PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) module providesin–band SNMP–managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1lines. The M–PATH 437 Channel Service Unit (CSU) module providesin–band SNMP–managed digital service access to E1 and fractional E1lines. CSU modules units plug into the CSU shelf (see Figure 3-8).The CSU shelf can support two M–PATH 537 or two M–PATH 437 CSUmodules. The 537 CSU module supports a single T1 span connection.The 437 CSU module supports a single E1 span connection.Remote M–PATH management is available via SNMP over an in–banddata link on the span line (using a facility data link or 8–64 Kbps of aDS0 channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can bean SNMP manager or another M–PATH CSU.Programming of the M–PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9–pinconnector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a MicrosoftWindows programming disk are supplied with each unit.For more information refer to M–PATH T1 Channel Service Unit User’sGuide, ADC Kentrox part number 65–77538101 or the M–PATH E1Channel Service Unit User’s Guide, ADC Kentrox part number TBD.Setting the Control PortWhichever control port is chosen, it must first be configured so thecontrol port switch settings match the communication parameters beingused by the control device. If using the rear–panel DTE control port, setthe SHELF ADDRESS switch SA5 to “up.” If using the rear–panel DCEcontrol port, position the SHELF ADDRESS switch down.For more information, refer to the 2–Slot Universal Shelf InstallationGuide, ADC Kentrox part number 65–78070001.Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:Part Number Description of Cable01–95006–022 (six feet) DB–9S to DB–9P01–95010–022 (ten feet)The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-16SA PC using the AT 9–pin interfaceSA modem using the 9–pin connectorSOther shelves in a daisy chainFigure 3-8: Rear and Front View of CSU ShelfREF. FW00212Front ViewSLOT 1 SLOT 2DCE Connector(Craft Port)Rear ViewTo/FromNetwork To/FromGLI2 To/FromNetwork To/FromGLI2CSU Modules3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued08/01/2001 3-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAlarm and Span Line CablePin/Signal InformationSee Figure 3-9 and refer to Table 3-5 for the physical location andpunchdown location information for the 50–pair punchblock.Figure 3-9: 50–Pair Punchblock TOP VIEW OF PUNCHBLOCKSTRAIN RELIEVE INCOMINGCABLE TO BRACKET WITHTIE WRAPS2T1T1R2T2R121R2RLEGEND1T = PAIR 1 – TIP1R = PAIR 1 –RING ” ” ” ” ” ”Frame Power EntryCompartment50R50T49R49T1TTO SPAN I/OCONNECTORTO ALARMCONNECTOR TO MODEMCONNECTORTO RGD/RGPSCONNECTORSC4812ETL0010–13
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-18Table 3-5: Punchdown Location for 50–Pair Punch BlockSite Component Signal Name Punchdown Color1T1R2T2R3T3RNOT 4TUSED 4R5T5R6T6R7TLFR_HSO_GND 7R OrangeEXT_IPPS_POS 8T RedEXT_IPPS_NEG 8R WhiteLFR/HSO CAL_+ 9T RedCAL_–9R GreenLORAN_ + 10T RedLORAN_ –10R BluePilot Beacon Alarm – Minor 11TPilot Beacon Alarm – Rtn 11RPilot Beacon Alarm – Major 12TPILOT BEACON Pilot Beacon Control – NO 12RPilot Beacon Control–COM 13TPilot Beacon Control – NC 13RCustomer Outputs 1 – NO 14TCustomer Outputs 1 – COM 14RCustomer Outputs 1 – NC 15TCustomer Outputs 2 – NO 15RCustomer Outputs 2 – COM 16TCustomer Outputs 2 – NC 16RCustomer Outputs 3 – NO 17TCustomer Outputs 3 – COM 17RCustomer Outputs 3 – NC 18TCustomer Outputs 4 – NO 18RCustomer Outputs 4–COM 19TCustomer Outputs 4 – NC 19RCustomer Inputs 1 20TCUSTOMER Cust_Rtn_A_1 20ROUTPUTS / INPUTS Customer Inputs 2 21TCust_Rtn_A_2 21RCustomer Inputs 3 22TCust_Rtn_A_3 22RCustomer Inputs 4 23TCust_Rtn_A_4 23RCustomer Inputs 5 24TCust_Rtn_A_5 24RCustomer Inputs 6 25TCust_Rtn_A_6 25RCustomer Inputs 7 26TCust_Rtn_A_7 26RCustomer Inputs 8 27T. . . continued on next page3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued08/01/2001 3-191X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-5: Punchdown Location for 50–Pair Punch BlockSite Component ColorPunchdownSignal NameCust_Rtn_A_8 27RCustomer Inputs 9 28TCUSTOMER Cust_Rtn_A_9 28ROUTPUTS / INPUTS Customer Inputs 10 29TCust_Rtn_A_10 29RRVC_TIP_A 30T Red/BkRVC_RING_A 30R RedXMIT_TIP_A 31T White/BkXMIT_RING_A 31R WhiteRVC_TIP_B 32T Green/BkRVC_RING_B 32R GreenXMIT_TIP_B 33T Blue/BkXMIT_RING_B 33R BlueRVC_TIP_C 34T Yellow/BkRVC_RING_C 34R YellowXMIT_TIP_C 35T Brown/BkXMIT_RING_C 35R BrownSPAN RVC_TIP_D 36T Orange/BkRVC_RING_D 36R OrangeXMIT_TIP_D 37T Violet/BkXMIT_RING_D 37R VioletRVC_TIP_E 38T Gray/BkRVC_RING_E 38R GrayXMIT_TIP_E 39T Pink/BkXMIT_RING_E 39R PinkRVC_TIP_F 40T Tan/BkRVC_RING_F 40R TanXMIT_TIP_F 41T Bk/WhiteXMIT_RING_F 41R BkGPS_POWER_A+ 42T BlueGPS_POWER_A–42R Blue/BkGPS_POWER_B+ 43T YellowGPS_POWER_B–43R Yellow/BkGPS_RX+ 44T WhiteGPS_RX–44R White/BkRGPS GPS_TX+ 45T GreenGPS_TX–45R Green/BkSignal Ground 46T RedMaster Frame 46R Red/BkGPS_lpps+ 47T BrownGPS_lpps–47R Brown/BkTelco_Modem_T 48TPhone Line Telco_Modem_R 48RChasis Ground 49T Cable DrainReserved 49RMiscellaneous Reserved 50TReserved 50R 3
LMF to BTS ConnectionPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-2068P09253A60LMF to BTS ConnectionThe CDMA LMF computer may be connected to the LAN A or Bconnector located behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-10below shows the general location of these connectors. LAN A isconsidered the primary LAN.Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS Step Action1To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable and utility shelf access panel, then pullapart the hook–and–loop fabric covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-10). If desired, slideout the utility shelf for the LMF computer.2Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA EthernetAdapter.NOTEXircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the CDMA LMF Ethernetconnection to the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DCtransformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed three feet in length.* IMPORTANTThe LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)must not touch the chassis during optimization.LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONSON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;ETHERNET “B” COVEREDWITH HOOK–AND–LOOPFABRIC)LMF COMPUTERTERMINAL WITHMOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNETADPATER & ETHERNETUTP ADAPTERUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11CONNECTORS)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTER CONNECTSDIRECTLY TO BNC T 115 VAC POWERCONNECTIONNOTE:Open LAN CABLE ACCESSdoor. Pull apart hook–and–loopfabric and gain access to theLAN A or LAN B LMF BNCconnector.Figure 3-10: LMF Connection DetailSC4812ETL0012–23
Using CDMA LMF08/01/2001 3-211X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBasic CDMA LMF OperationThe CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operatingenvironments which are accessed using the specified desktop icons:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic operation of the CDMA LMF in either environment includesperforming the following:SSelecting and Deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusThe following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUIenvironment:SSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other CDMA LMFoperations, refer to the LMF Help function and the LMF CLI Reference;68P09253A56.Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manualare performed using the GUI environment.IMPORTANT*CDMA LMF and Logical BTSAn SC4812ET Lite logical BTS can consist of up to two SC4812ET Liteframes. When the CDMA LMF is connected to a frame 1 Ethernet portof a logical BTS, access is available to all devices in all of the framesthat make up the logical BTS. A logical BTS CDF file that includesequipage information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devicesis required for proper LMF interface. A CBSC CDF file that includeschannel data for all of the logical BTS frames is also required.The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (for example,BTS–812–1) and the second frame of the logical BTS is numbered withthe suffix, –101 (e. g. BTS–812–101). When the CDMA LMF is loggedinto a BTS, a FRAME tab is displayed for each frame. If there is onlyone frame for the BTS, there will only be one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1for BTS–282). If a logical BTS has more than one frame, there will be a3
Using CDMA LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-22separate FRAME tab for each frame(for example, FRAME–438–1, andFRAME–438–101 for BTS–438 that has both frames). If an RFDS isincluded in the CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) will bedisplayed.Actions, such as ATP tests, can be initiated for selected devices in one ormore frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the CDMA LMF Select deviceshelp screen for information on how to select devices.Logging Into a BTSBe sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file isused for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that areprovided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use thecorrect CDF files can result in invalid optimization.Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.CAUTIONLogging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTSand the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTSs at atime, but only one CDMA LMF may be logged into each BTS.Before attempting to start the CDMA LMF computer and the CDMALMF software, confirm the CDMA LMF computer is properly connectedto the BTS (see Table 3-6). Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to loginto a BTS.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe CDMA LMF is correctly installed and prepared.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC files exists.SThe CDMA LMF computer was connected to the BTS before startingthe Windows operating system and the CDMA LMF software. Ifnecessary, restart the computer after connecting it to the BTS inaccordance with Table 3-6 and Figure 3-10.3
Using CDMA LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-231X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if theLMF is not running).NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).3Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IPAddress box.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Change the Multi-channel Preselector from the Multi-channel Preselector pick list (normallyMPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.9Use a Tower Top Amplifier is not applicable to the SC4812ET Lite.10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)NOTESIf you attempt to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devicescan be seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can beseen. 3
Using CDMA LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-24BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using theCLI environment.If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at thesame time, the GUI must be started first and BTS loginmust be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-7 tostart the GUI environment and log into a BTS.IMPORTANT*Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login ProcedurenStep Action1 Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not alreadyrunning).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLIsession will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts–<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if thisis first login to this BTS)port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first loginto this BTS)A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts–3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason” Logging Out Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLIoperating environments.3
Using CDMA LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-251X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYThe GUI and CLI environments use the same connection toa BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and CLIenvironments at the same time, logging out of the BTS ineither environment will log out of it for both. When eithera login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there isno GUI indication that the login or logout has occurred.IMPORTANT*Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout ProcedurenStep Action1Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).3Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time asthe GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system could not log out of theBTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for furtheroperations.4If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the BaseStation because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and clickYes in the Logout Error popup which appears again.6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Select menu on the BTS tab will only log you out of the displayed BTS.SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selectionin the menu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–upmessage will appear. 3
Using CDMA LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-26Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout ProcedurenStep Action* IMPORTANTIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be donewith it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts–<bts#>A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=logout bts–3313:24:51.028 Command In Progress13:24:52.04 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:Killing background processes.... Establishing an MMICommunication SessionFor those procedures which require MMI communication between theCDMA LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedures in Table 3-11 toinitiate the communication session.Figure 3-11 illustrates common equipment connections for the CDMALMF computer. For specific connection locations on FRUs, refer to theillustration accompanying the procedures which require the MMIcommunication session.Table 3-11: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure whichrequires the MMI communication session.2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.. . . continued on next page3
Using CDMA LMF – continued08/01/2001 3-271X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-11: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep ActionNOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection fromthe Windows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (e.g., MMI Session)>3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure isobtained. NULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE (P/N30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERFigure 3-11: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI ConnectionsCOM1ORCOM2Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in CDMA LMF by clicking onHelp in the menu bar.3
Pinging the ProcessorsPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-28Pinging the BTSFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be be verified. Figure 3-12 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration for the SC4812ET Lite with an expansion frame. Thedrawing depicts cabling and termination for both the A and B LANs.Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN networkmodules to get a response from the specified “target” module.Follow the steps in Table 3-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN Aand LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby Electro–Static Discharge (ESD).CAUTIONSIGNALGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩINSC4812ET Lite(MASTER) SC4812ET Lite(EXPANSION)SIGNALGROUNDFigure 3-12: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram50Ω50ΩSC4812ETL0013–4SIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUNDFRAME GROUNDTRIAXTERMINATORTRIAXTERMINATORTRIAXTERMINATORTRIAXTERMINATORINOUTOUT3
Pinging the Processors – continued08/01/2001 3-291X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYThe Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminationsmust be installed on each frame/enclosure external LANconnector before performing this test. All other processorboard LAN connections are made through the backplanes.IMPORTANT*Table 3-12: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action1If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI2 which has been replaced,perform the procedure in Table 6-3 and then return to step 2.2Be sure uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors in the power entry compartment (rear offrame – Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-12) are terminated with 50 Ω loads.3If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 andFigure 3-10.)4If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7).5In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the frame LAN B IN connector. TheCDMA LMF session should remain active. Replace the 50Ω terminator on the BTS frame LAN B INconnector.6From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.7In the Open box, type ping and the GLI2 IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI2 in field BTS units.8Click on OK.9If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255SIf the device responds, proceed to step 18.If there is no response the following is displayed:Request timed outSIf the GLI2 fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typicalproblems would be: failure of the CDMA LMF to login, shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, opencables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI2 itself.10 Logout of the BTS as described in Table 3-9, exit from the CDMA LMF program, and restart theWindows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.11 Restart the CDMA LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function, and log into the BTS asdescribed in Table 3-7.12 Perform steps 6 through 9 again.SIf the device responds, proceed to step 18.If there is still no response,proceed to step 13.. . . continued on next page3
Pinging the Processors – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-30Table 3-12: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action13 If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the CDMA LMF computer, press the MGLI front panel resetpushbutton and perform steps 6 through 9 again.14 NOTERefer to Table 6-1 if ping was unsuccessful after resetting the MGLI.15 After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTSframe LAN B IN connector in the power entry compartment (Figure 3-12). Disconnect the LMF cablefrom the LAN shelf LAN A connector, and connect it to LAN B (right–hand connector) using aBNC–female–to–BNC–female adapter (refer to Figure 3-10).16 In the power entry compartment, remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS frame LAN A IN connector.17 Repeat steps 5 through 8 using LAN B.18 After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination onthe frame LAN A IN connector in the power entry compartment.19 Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN shelf LAN B and connect it to LAN A using aBNC-female-to-BNC-female adapter.20 Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the MGLI to switch toprimary LAN A.21 Repeat steps 5 through 8 to ensure proper primary LAN operation. 3
Download the BTS08/01/2001 3-311X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYOverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and datamust be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTScan be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the CDMA LMF is NOTroutine maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It isonly done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in thedevice does not match the release level of the site operating softwareAND the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to perform thedownload. An example would be a BTS loaded with Release 9.2software where a GLI loaded with Release 2.8.1 ROM code must beinstalled to replace a malfunctioning MGLI.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correctROM code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMFcomputer. ROM code must be manually selected for download.ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded will change toOOS–ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS–ROM (blue) when thedownload is completed. The same Revision–level RAM code must thenbe downloaded to the device. For example, if Release 2.9.2.1.1 ROMcode is downloaded, Release 2.9.2.1.1 RAM code must be downloaded.Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix G.RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correctRAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAMcode can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selectedautomatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code that matchesthe “NextLoad” parameter of the CDF file). The RAM code file in thecode folder must have the correct hardware bin number.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS-ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device willchange to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLIor GLI, the CDMA LMF automatically also downloads data and thenenables the MGLI. When enabled, the MGLI will change to INS (green).For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM(yellow).3
Download the BTS – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-32RAM code downloading requires a few minutes. After the downloadstarts, the non–GLI device being loaded changes to OOS–ROM (blue). Ifthe download is completed successfully, the non–GLI device changes toOOS–RAM (yellow).The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI2)SRedundant GLI (GLI2)SClock Syncronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code mustbe loaded)SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24 or MCC8E) cardSBroadband Transceiver (BBX2)SRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC), if equippedThe MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAMcode and data, and in INS (green) status beforedownloading any other device. The RAM code downloadprocess for an MGLI automatically downloads data andthen enables the MGLI.IMPORTANT*Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsDevices should not be loaded with RAM code which is for a differentsystem release than the ROM code with which they are loaded. Beforedownloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow theprocedure in Table 3-13 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with thecorrect ROM code for the system release used by the BSS.Table 3-13: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-7).2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the menu bar.3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI2.SThe system release number will be the first two decimal divisions of the number; for example, thenumber 2.15.0.0.3 would be for System Release 2.15, and 2.9.2.2.34 would be for System Release2.9.4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not for the correct system release, log out of the BTS,disconnect the CDMA LMF computer, reconnect the span lines as described in Table 5-7, and have theCBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the system release being used, be sure the span linesare disabled as outlined in Table 3-4 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data. 3
Download the BTS – continued08/01/2001 3-331X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYDownload RAM Code and Datato MGLI and GLI Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-14 to download the RAM code anddata to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.PrerequisitesSPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for eachof the devices to be loaded.SThe CDMA LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer toTable 3-6), and is logged in using the GUI environment (refer toTable 3-7).Table 3-14: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI DevicesStep Action1From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.2Select the correct code version for the system release being used and click Save.3Download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.4From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the statuswindow. (The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.)5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices andrepeating step 4.6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices. Download RAM Code and Datato Non–GLI DevicesDownloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for eachdevice or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAMcode and data are downloaded to non–GLI devices in separate steps.CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer softwareversion needs to be loaded.IMPORTANT*When downloading to multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). Thesedevices can be loaded individually after completing themultiple download.NOTEFollow the steps in Table 3-15 to download RAM code and data tonon–GLI devices.3
Download the BTS – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-34Table 3-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesStep Action1Select the target CSM, MCC, and BBX device(s).2From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.NOTEAfter a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to theOOS–RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.4To download data, select the target CSM and MCC device(s).5From the Device pull down menu, select Download Data.A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.6 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed. Select CSM Clock SourceA CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Sourcefunction can be used to select the clock source for each of the threeinputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs tobe changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clocksource options.SLocal GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for source 2 & 3)SLFR (only for source 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)PrerequisitesMGLI=INS_ACT (green), CSM= OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT(green)Table 3-16: Select CSM Clock SourceStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s).2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Clock Source menu item.4Click on the Select menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the relatedcheck box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.. . . continued on next page3
Download the BTS – continued08/01/2001 3-351X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-16: Select CSM Clock SourceStep Action6Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selectionaction.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window. Enable CSMsEach BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typicaloperation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either anon–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).The GPS receiver interfaced to CSM 1 is used as the primary timingreference and synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 providesclock syncronization back–up, but does not have a GPS receiver.The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver(LFR), a High Stability Oscillator (HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidiumsource which the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In allcases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a giventime.For RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPSreceiver “daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1slot before continuing.IMPORTANT*Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the CSMs installed inthe SCCP shelves.Table 3-17: Enable CSMsStep Action1NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first.Click on the target CSM.From the Device pull down, select Enable.2A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.Click OK to close the status report window.NOTESCSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).SFAIL may be shown in the status report table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shownin the Description field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.. . . continued on next page3
Download the BTS – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-36Table 3-17: Enable CSMsStep Action* IMPORTANTThe GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operatedby the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alters satellite orbits;therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPSreceiver “almanac” to be updated.Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position fixfor a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiverneeds to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).3NOTESIf equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should bedark green(INS–STB)SIf more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-13 and Table 3-20 todetermine the cause.After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, be sure the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state). Enable MCCsThis procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in theBTS (approximately 3 mS).Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to enable the MCCs installed inthe SCCP shelves.The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled,prior to downloading and enabling the MCC.IMPORTANT*Table 3-18: Enable MCCsStep Action1Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose All MCCs.2From the Device menu, select EnableA status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.3 Click OK to close the status report window. 3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification08/01/2001 3-371X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYClock SynchronizationManager (CSM) System TimeThe primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)cards is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM card in SCCP shelfslot CSM–1 is the primary timing source while the card in slot CSM–2provides redundancy. The second generation CSM card (CSM2) isrequired when using the remote GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses aGPS receiver in the antenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2card. A CSM2 card can have a local GPS receiver daughter card tosupport an RF–GPS signal.Each CSM2 card features a temperature–stablized, crystal oscillator thatprovides 19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referencesignals to the synchronization source selected from the following (referto Table 3-20 for source selection/verification procedures):SGPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/R–GPSSLORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High StabilityOscillator (HSO)SExternal reference oscillator sourcesCDMA Clock Distribution Cards (CCDs) buffer and distributeeven–second reference and 19.6608 MHz clock signals from the CSMcards. CCD 1 is married to the card in slot CSM–1, and CCD 2 ismarried to the card in slot CSM–2.The BTS switches between the primary and redundant units (card slotsCSM–1 and CSM–2, respectively) upon failure or command. A failurein CSM–1 or CCD 1 will cause the system to switch to theCSM–2–CCD 2 redundant card pair.Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event ofa GPS receiver failure in CSM–1. During normal operation, the card inCSM–1 selects GPS as the primary timing source (Table 3-20). Thesource selection can also be overridden via the CDMA LMF or by thesystem software.In addition to providing GPS synchronization to the LFR or HSOback–up sources, synchronization between the primary and redundantCSM–CCD pairs increases reliability.Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability OscillatorThe CSM performs the overall configuration and status monitoringfunctions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO iscapable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPSreference signal.The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN–C RFsignals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-38synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. TheLFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since theHSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOXLFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to theexpansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logicalframes require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame hasan LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frameand interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR andLFR2 use the same source code in source selection (Table 3-20). HSO,HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection(Table 3-20).Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSMcard warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature andoscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Testequipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standardtimebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurementsare made.NOTE3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/01/2001 3-391X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the ClockSynchronization Module (CSM) cards before performing the RF pathverification tests.Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to set up test equipment.Table 3-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action1a For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM card with a GPS receiver is installed in the primary CSMslot, CSM–1, and that CSM–1 is INS.NOTEThis is verified by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the card in slot 1.1b For Remote GPS (RGPS): Verify a CSM2 card is installed in primary slot CSM–1 and that CSM–1 isINS.NOTEThis is verified by checking the card ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC or subsequent.2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modemcard) to the MMI port on CSM–1 (see Figure 3-13).3Reinstall CSM–2.4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-11) .5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.In the power entry compartment, connect the GPS antennato the RF GPS connector ONLY. Damage to the GPSantenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS antenna isinadvertently connected to any other RF connector.CAUTION3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-40NULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS–232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFigure 3-13: CSM MMI Terminal ConnectionFW00372CSM card shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCE(NOTE 1)EVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9–PIN TO 9–PINRS–232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS–RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = FaultGPS Initialization/VerificationPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for atleast 15 minutes.SThe CDMA LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of theprimary CSM as shown in Figure 3-13.SA HyperTerminal session has been started (Table 3-11), and the CSM>prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window (Table 3-19).Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to initialize and verify properGPS receiver functioning.3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/01/2001 3-411X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus–The system will display a response similiar to the following:CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and GPSreceivers:sources–When equipped with LFR, the system will generate a response similar to the following:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not UsedCurrent reference source number: 0–When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* No*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theHSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid sourceby confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-42Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.* IMPORTANTIf any of the above areas fail, verify:–If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !–If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective–Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible card warpage4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):–GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.–At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/01/2001 3-431X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus–Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):–At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.–GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!–Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-44Table 3-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:–If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).–If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to beaccurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.–The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.–GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.–There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.–Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–201317510 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):–Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).–Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).–TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp 3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/01/2001 3-451X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYLORAN–CInitialization/VerificationTable 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationStep Action Note1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in trackingmode. A typical response is:CSM> lstatus <cr>LFR St ti St tLFR Station Status:Clock coherence: 512 >5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N FlThis must be greaterthan 100 before LFRbecomes a valid source.7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N FlagThis shows the LFR islocked to the selectedPLL station.8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flg9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:9610W 47/49 dB –4S/N Flag:E9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980WLFR Recent Change Data:Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >PLL GRI: 7980WLFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.CSM>This search list and PLLdata must match theconfiguration for thegeographical locationof the cell site.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-46Table 3-21: LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationStep NoteAction2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):–Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).–Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Zassignment.–Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.–Observe the following typical response.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 1*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the LFR is warming up. “Not–Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the LFR does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theLFR as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 24LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source(verified from left to right).* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:–The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.–The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m(300 ft) in length.–A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.–The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .NOTELFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use theunderlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.5Close the hyperterminal window. 3
Test Equipment Setup08/01/2001 3-471X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYConnecting Test Equipment tothe BTSAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE–488/GPIBbus. The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory setGPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMFand any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses havebeen set correctly as follows:SPower meter address should be 13SCommunications test set should be 18The following test equipment is required to perform optimization,calibration and ATP tests:SCDMA LMFSCommunications test set model supported by the CDMA LMFSPower meter model supported by the CDMA LMF (required whenusing the HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 test sets)SNon–radiating transmit line termination loadSDirectional coupler and in–line attenuatorSRF cables and adaptersRefer to Table 3-22 for an overview of connections for test equipmentcurrently supported by the CDMA LMF. In addition, see the followingfigures:SFigure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TXcalibrationSFigure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP testsSupported Test EquipmentOptimization and ATP testing may be performed using the following testequipment:SCyberTestSAdvantest R3465 and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSHewlett–Packard HP 8935SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface (1.9 GHz))and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optionalSRubidium Standard Timebase – optionalTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX)test connections must be through a 30 dB directionalcoupler plus a 20 dB in-line attenuator for both the 800MHz and 1.9 GHz BTSs.CAUTION3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-48Test Equipment PreparationFor specific steps to prepare each type of test set and power meter toperform calibration and ATP, see Appendix F.Test Equipment ConnectionChartTable 3-22 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorolastandards.To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presentlybeing used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable tothat port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.Table 3-22: Test Equipment SetupTEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber–Test Ad-vantest HP8935 HP8921AHP8921W/PCS PowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF DirectionalCoupler & Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EVENSEC REF EVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEIN EXTREF INCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB HP–IB HP–IB GPIB SERIALPORTHP–IB HP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50–OHM RFIN/OUT TX1–6RFIN/OUT RFIN/OUT 20 DBPAD BTSPORTRX TESTCABLES RF IN/OUT RF OUT50–OHM DUPLEX RX1–12DUPLEXOUT RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITOR3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued08/01/2001 3-491X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYEquipment Warm-upWarm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutesprior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. Thisassures BTS site stability and contributes to optimizationaccuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts aswarm-up time.)IMPORTANT*Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA BBXchannels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSCplace the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under testOOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.WARNINGAutomatic Cable CalibrationSet–upFigure 3-14 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported testsets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input andoutput ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for eachtest. Table 3-26 provides a procedure for calibrating cables.3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-50Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935Advantest Model R3465DUPLEXOUTRF OUT50–OHMINPUT50–OHMRF GEN OUTANT INANTINSUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORFOR 1.9 GHZCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The Directional Coupler is not used with theCybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connecteddirectly to the Cybertest Test Set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest TestSet. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEFigure 3-14: Cable Calibration Test SetupFW00089Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921ADIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTER50 ΩΤERM.3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued08/01/2001 3-511X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYManual Cable CalibrationIf manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures inAppendix F.Set–up for TX CalibrationFigure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANEL RFIN/OUTRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCHSETTINGS**2O DBIN–LINEATTENUATOR10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORT OR TXRFDSDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORFigure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935)FW00094DIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)** BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH50 ΩΤERM.3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-52POWER METERTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCHSETTINGS*2O DBIN–LINEATTENUATOR10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX ANTENNA GROUPOR TX RFDS DIRECTIONALCOUPLERSTXTESTCABLEPOWERSENSORFW00095NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTESTCANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. APOWER METER MUST BE USED.Figure 3-16: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and AdvantestDIRECTIONAL COUPLER(30 DB)* BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH50 ΩΤERM.3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued08/01/2001 3-531X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSetup for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP tests.Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXAdvantest Model R3465INPUT50–OHMGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE: The Directional Coupler is not usedwith the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable isconnected directly to the Cybertest Test set.RF OUTRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIPSWITCH SETTINGS*10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED, BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP AND USE THE 30 DBDIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DBIN–LINEATTENUATORDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)EVENSECOND/SYNCIN (BNC “T”WITH 50 OHMTERMINATOR)CDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMFW00096Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRFOUT* BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH50 ΩΤERM.SYNC MONITOR EVENSEC TICK PULSEREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDBNC“T”TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTORON REAR OF TEST SET(FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-3)3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-54RF OUTONLYHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)HP PCSINTERFACE*GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIPSWITCH SETTINGS*10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUT100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DBIN–LINEATTENUATOREVENSECOND/SYNCIN (BNC “T”WITH 50 OHMTERMINATOR)CDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMRFIN/OUTFigure 3-18: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921AREF FW00097GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)* FOR 1700 AND1900 MHZ ONLYDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)RFIN/OUTRF OUTONLY* BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH50 ΩΤERM.NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED, BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP AND USE THE 30 DBDIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR.3
Test Set CalibrationPRELIMINARY08/01/2001 3-551X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPBackgroundProper test equipment set–up ensures that all measurements are correctand the test equipment and associated test cables do not introducemeasurement errors.If the test equipment set (see Chapter 1, Terms andAbbreviations) being used to interface with the BTS hasbeen calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure doesnot need to be performed.NOTEThis procedure must be performed before the optimization. Verify all testequipment (including all associated test cables and adapters actually usedto interface all test equipment and the BTS) has been calibrated andmaintained as a set.If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,that makes up the calibrated test equipment set has beenreplaced, the set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so canintroduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.Motorola recommends repeating cable calibration beforetesting at each BTS site.CAUTIONCalibration of the communications test set (or equivalenttest equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipmentafter it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.IMPORTANT*PurposeThese procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routineused to determine the path losses of the supported communicationsanalyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antennaswitch that make up the overall calibrated test equipment set. Aftercalibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurementoffset file on the CDMA LMF.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-56Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and AdvantestR3465 communications test sets are provided in Appendix F, if needed.Manual power meter calibration procedures are also included inAppendix F.Selecting Test EquipmentPrerequisitesA Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided fortest equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when thetest equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMFcomputer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tabis used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via anetwork connection.Ensure the following has been completed before selecting testequipment:STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.STest equipment GPIB addresses have been verified as correct.SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected tothe GPIB box.Selecting Test EquipmentUse Options > LMF Options in the menu bar to select test equipmentautomatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.Manually Selecting TestEquipment in a SerialConnection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the testequipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the testequipment is actually detected for manual specification.Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabStep Action1In the menu bar, click Options and select LMF Options... from the pulldown. The LMF Optionswindow appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box. Addresses are:13=Power Meter18=CDMA Analyzer. . . continued on next page3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/01/2001 3-571X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPTable 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabStep Action7Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been recorded.)NOTEWith manual selection, CDMA LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected andcommunicating with CDMA LMF.8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window. Automatically Selecting TestEquipment in a SerialConnection Tab When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, theCDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actuallycommunicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24to use the auto-detect feature.Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectStep Action1In the menu bar, click Options and select LMF Options... from the pulldown. The LMF Optionswindow appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).* IMPORTANTWhen both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses tosearch box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a powermeter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in theGPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If thetest equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is notselected.6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will appearin the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window. 3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-58Calibrating Test EquipmentThe calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement levelof the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected (for example, an HP437 and an HP8921A/600), only the power meter is zeroed.Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibratetest equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipmentmust be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure inTable 3-25 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 3-25: Test Equipment CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Followthe instructions provided.2Follow the direction provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window. Calibrating Cables – OverviewThe cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for theTX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer isused to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cableconfiguration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibrationconsists of the following steps.SMeasure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for anymeasurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used onlyfor the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RXcable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of theshort cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RXcable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RXcable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in theanalyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements.SThe short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured. TheRX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable withtype–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX portthe test equipment. For BTSs with antenna ports carrying duplexed TXand RX, a directional coupler and, if required by BTS type, anadditional attenuator are also used on the RX cable configuration andmust be included in the measurement.SThe short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured. TheTX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables withtype–N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additionalattenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path loss3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/01/2001 3-591X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPof the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS(normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is differentin that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TXcable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.Calibrating Cables with aCDMA AnalyzerThe Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used tocalibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with anHP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer typeor the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method mustbe used (refer to Table 3-27 and Table 3-28). Cablecalibration values must be manually entered if the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer method is used. For theHP8921A, refer to Appendix F.NOTEThe test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-14illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup.Table 3-26: Cable CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with acomma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will becalibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TXcalibration.3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibrationpicklist.4 Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayedwith the results of the cable calibration. 3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-60Calibrating TX Cables Using aSignal Generator and SpectrumAnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the TX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-19 for adiagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of the 869.7–893.31 MHz band for NorthAmerican cellular and 1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-19, “A”) and record the value.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of thediagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869.7–893.31 MHz band for North Americancellular and 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.5Calibration factor = A – B Example: Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures usethe correct calibration factor. Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THEPOWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATIONAND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TXATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLETHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTIONTO THE TX PORTS DURING TXCALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RXPORTS DURING ATP TESTS.SECOND RFTEST CABLE.ONE 20DB 20 W INLINE ATTENUATOR(1.9 GHZ ONLY)FW002933
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/01/2001 3-611X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPCalibrating RX Cables Using aSignal Generator and SpectrumAnalyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the RX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-20, if required.Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824.7–848.31 MHz for NorthAmerican cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-20, “A”) and record the valuefor “A”.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at thecustomer’s RX frequency (824.7–848.31 MHz for North American cellular or 1850–1910 MHz bandfor North American PCS). Record the value at point ‘‘B”.* IMPORTANTWhen preparing to calibrate a BTS with duplexed TX and RX the cable calibration setup must includethe 30 dB directional coupler and 20 dB in–line attenuator as in the TX cable calibration shown inFigure 3-19.5Calibration factor = A – BExample: Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBNOTEThe short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final testsetup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, toensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor. Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)SpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE OUTPUTPORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTSSignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORLONGCABLE 2SHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE RX PORTSDURING RX MEASUREMENTS.IMPORTANT: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTSTO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA GROUP ANDMUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30 DBDIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 3-19.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-62Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations arenormally set by accomplishing automatic cable calibration with use ofthe applicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cableloss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.Cable loss values must be manually entered in the LMFdatabase if manual cable calibration was performed.Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTS calibrationand reduced site performance.CAUTIONPrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-29: Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit > Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTESIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/01/2001 3-631X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPSetting TX Coupler Loss Value If an in–service TX coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TXcalibration and audit calculations.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit > TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTESThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Options > LMF Options > BTS Options tab mustchecked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and auditfunctions.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
Bay Level Offset CalibrationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-64IntroductionCalibration compensates for normal equipment variations within theBTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.RF Path Bay Level OffsetCalibrationBay Level Offset (BLO) calibration identifies the accumulated gain inevery transmit path (BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value inthe CDMA LMF CAL file. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded toeach BBX2.Each transmit path starts at an SCCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travelsthrough the CIO card, trunking module, LPA, trunking module (again),TX filter or TX filter combiner, DRDC or TRDC, and ends at a BTS TXantenna port.Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port, travels through aDRDC or TRDC, the MPC card, the CIO card, and terminates at abackplane BBX2 slot.Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path ( byBBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Whenthe TX path calibration is performed, the RX path BLO willautomatically be set to the default value.When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated onceeach year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for allassociated RF paths after replacing any of the following components orassociated interconnecting RF cabling:SBBX2 boardSSCCP shelfSCIO cardSCIO–to–LPA trunking module RF cableSLPA trunking moduleSLPASTrunking module–to–TX filter/filter combiner RF cableSTX filter or TX filter combinerSTX filter/filter combiner–to–DRDC/TRDC cableSDRDC or TRDC3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-651X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTX Path CalibrationThe TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and thefirst order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper functionof each RF path is verified during calibration. The external testequipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector you must first verify that there are noCDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sectorassigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGAlways wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,there is a high probability that the card/module could bedamaged by ESD.CAUTIONAt new site installations, to facilitate the complete test ofeach SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populatedwith BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelvescurrently not under test and install them into the emptyBBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure thatall BBX2 TX paths are tested.–This procedure can be bypassed on operational sitesthat are due for periodic optimization.–Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify thecorrect BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file asrequired to include BBX2 slots not currentlyequipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).IMPORTANT*RX Path CalibrationRX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTSsystems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibrationdata files during the TX calibration routine. Functionality is verifiedduring Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-66BLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the CDMA LMF creates a calibration(CAL) data file where BLO values are stored. After calibration has beencompleted, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBX2s using theCDMA LMF Download BLO function. An explanation of the file isshown below.Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printingout a copy of a bts.cal file and referring to it for thefollowing descriptions.NOTEThe CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per–slot basis (aslot Block).The Slot 1 Block contains the calibration data for the six BBX2 slots.The Slot 20 Block contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2(see Table 3-32). Each BBX2 slot Block header contains:SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries correspondingto 360 calibration points of the CAL file – plus the slot Block format.Within the slot Block body, the BBX2 calibration data (BayLevelCal) isorganized as a large flat array. The array is organized by branch, BBX2SCCP cage slot, and calibration point.SThe first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the containedcalibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main receive, anddiversity receive offsets as follows:Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch AssignmentsRange Branch AssignmentC[1]–C[120] TransmitC[121]–C[240] No SC4812ET Lite BLO calpoint entries (default only)C[241]–C[360] ReceiveC[361]–C[480] No SC4812ET Lite BLO calpoint entries (default only)C[481]–C[600] Diversity ReceiveC[601]–C[720] No SC4812ET Lite BLO calpoint entries (default only)3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-671X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSThe second breakdown of the array is by BBX by sector. Three sectorsare allowed.Table 3-32: SC4812ET Lite BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX2 Sectorization TX Branch RX Branch RX DiversityBranchSlot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 6)1 (Omni) C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector, C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]31st Carrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]4 C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]53–Sector, C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]62nd Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]Not Used in SC4812ET Lite(CAL file entries are C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660](CAL file entries are Channel 0 with default C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]power set level.) C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]Slot[20] (Redundant BBX2–R1)1 (Omni) C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]23–Sector, C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]31st Carrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]4 C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]53–Sector, C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]62nd Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]Not Used in SC4812ET Lite(CAL file entries are C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660](CAL file entries are Channel 0 with default C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]power set level.) C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]SRefer to the CAL file print–out and Table 3-32. It can be seen thatthere is one BBX2 slot per sector, and 10 calibration points for eachBBX2 (sector) are supported for each branch. Each “calibration point”consists of two entries.SThe first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies theCDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. The secondcalibration point entry (all even entries) is the power set level(PwrLvlAdj). The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from 2500 to 275003
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-68(2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500 corresponds to +125dBm).SThe 10 calibration points for each slot/branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequencycalibrated is written into the remainder of the 10 points for thatslot/branch.Example:C[1]=384 (odd cal entry)C[2]=19102 (even cal entry)C[3]=777 (odd cal entry)C[4]=19086 (even cal entry)C[19]=777 (odd cal entry)C[20]=19086 (even cal entry)...= 1 “calibration point”In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies(channels 384 and 777) for SCCP slot BBX–1 transmit (Table 3-32).The BLO data for the highest frequency measured (777) will bewritten to the remaining eight transmit calibration points (defined byentries C[5] through C[20]) for BBX2–1.SWhen BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs, the data is downloadedto the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TxCal data(C[1] – C[60]) is sent first. BBX2 slot 1’s 10 calibration points (C[1]– C[20]) are sent initially, followed by BBX2 slot 2’s 10 calibrationpoints (C[21] – C[40]), and so on. The RxCal data is sent next,followed by the RxDCal data.STemperature compensation data (TempLevelCal) is also stored in theCAL file for each slot Block.Test Equipment Setup:RF Path CalibrationFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-33 and refer as needed toFigure 3-15 or Figure 3-16 to set up test equipment.Table 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration)Step Action1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to interface the CDMA LMFcomputer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session.3If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-691X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-33: Set Up Test Equipment (RF Path Calibration)Step Action! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dBdirectional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900MHz.4For TX path calibration, verify that the coaxial cable from the appropriate ANTENNA connector(Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7) is connected to the test equipment RF input port via the directionalcoupler.Transmit (TX) Path CalibrationThe assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TXports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. EachBBX2 at the site is assigned to a sector and carrier. These are specifiedrespectively in the sector and carrier fields of the ParentCARRIERparameter in each BBX2’s CDF file block. The channel frequency anddesired power for the assigned sector are specified respectively in theChannelList and SIFPilotPwr parameters of the CDF block for theCARRIER to which the BBX2 is assigned.The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the measured power towithin +0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if theerror is less than +1.5 dB.The TX BLO for the SC4812ET Lite is approximately 42.0 dB ±5.0 dB.BLO is the gain in dB between the known power output of the BBX2and the measured power at the TX port. BLO is derived by deducting theknown BBX2 power output from the power measured at the TX port or(Measured Power) – (BBX2 TX Power Output).Example:Measured Power (at TX port) = 36.0 dBmKnown BBX TX Power Output = –6.0 dBmBLO = (36.0) – (–6.0) = 42.0 dB gainThe CDMA LMF Tests menu list items TX Calibration and AllCal/Audit perform TX BLO Calibration testing for installed BBX(s).The All Cal/Audit menu item initiates a series of actions to perform TXcalibration, download BLO, and perform TX audit if the TX calibrationpasses. The TX Calibration selection performs only the TX calibration.When the TX Calibration selection is used, BLO download and TXaudit must be performed as separate activities. All measurements aremade through the appropriate antenna connector using the calibrated TXcable setup.In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-70additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path lossesshould be added into each applicable sector using the Util > Edit > TXCoupler Loss... function.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and dataload.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16and follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibrationtest.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGVerify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned havebeen returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2boards moved since they were downloaded will have to bedownloaded again.IMPORTANT*3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-711X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-34: All Cal/Audit Path CalibrationStep Action1Configure test equipment for TX path calibration per Table 3-33.2Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.3From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.5Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6Click on OK.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.The test results will be displayed in the status report window.8Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. TX Calibration TestPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SMGLI and primary CSM and BDC are INS_ACT (CSM clock valid)SAll BBXs are OOS–RAM (yellow)STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibrationSLMF is logged in to the BTS in the GUI environmentVerify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have beenreturned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boardsmoved since being downloaded will have to bedownloaded with code and data again.IMPORTANT*If just a TX calibration must be run by itself, follow the procedures inTable 3-35.Table 3-35: TX Calibration TestStep Action1Configure test equipment for TX path calibration per Table 3-33.2Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.3From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list (press and hold the Shiftor Ctrl keyboard key to select multiple items).. . . continued on next page3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-72Table 3-35: TX Calibration TestStep Action5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results will be displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click OK to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset(BLO) calibration file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from theCAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded tothe selected BBX2 devices.If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).STX calibration successfully completedAfter a TX calibration has been performed using the procedure inTable 3-35, follow the steps in Table 3-36 to download the BLO data tothe BBX2s.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-731X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-36: Download BLOStep Action1Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.2From the Device menu, select Download BLO.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.3 Click OK to close the status report window. Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit proceduremeasures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at the site.In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success orfailure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.*RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO datadownload to BBX2s must have been successfullycompleted prior to performing the calibration audit.IMPORTANTTransmit (TX) Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2slots, per the steps in Table 3-37.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGIf a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTE3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-74TX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for aBBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SCSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.After a TX calibration has been performed using the procedure inTable 3-35, or if verification of BLO data in the CAL file is required,connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-15 or Figure 3-16 andfollow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the BTS TX Path Audittest.Table 3-37: TX Path AuditStep Action1Select the BBX2(s) to be audited. From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.2Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.3Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.4Click on OK.5Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.6Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-751X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCreate CAL FileThe Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist anew one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After aBTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it canbe transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfullyperformed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL filewill exist. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action cancause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of theBTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use theCreate Cal File function the edited information will be lost.CAUTIONPrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SLMF is logged into the BTSSBBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloadedTable 3-38: Create CAL FileStep Action1Select the applicable BBX2s. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBX2s.2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window displays the results of the action.4 Click OK. 3
RFDS Setup and CalibrationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-76RFDS DescriptionThe optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from theCBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)SFWT Interface Card (FWTIC)SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMACDMA RFDS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A93, CDMA RFDSUser’s Guide; 68P64114A51, and the LMF Help function.RFDS Parameter SettingsThe bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that mustmatch the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe theeditable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to editthe parameter settings.SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS2 = Cobra RFDSSTsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) TSU not equipped1 = TSU is equipped in the systemSMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (SC9600 internal RFDS only)SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = EquippedSTestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials whenoriginating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,and is to be used in this field.)Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf fileto verify, view, or modify data.NOTE3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-771X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-39: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action* IMPORTANTLog out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file (1 = GLI basedRFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).EXAMPLE:RfdsEquip = 2TsuEquip = 1MC1Equip = 0MC2Equip = 0MC3Equip = 0MC4Equip = 0Asu1Equip = 1Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)TestOrigDN = ’123456789’NOTEThe above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC–R andcopied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC–R if the RFDSPARM database ismodified for the RFDS.2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloadedto the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).3To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window is displayedshowing status of the download. Click OK to close the status report window.! CAUTIONAfter downloading data to the GLI2 the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green forapproximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LEDremains green.4Status the RFDS TSU. A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSICand SUA.* IMPORTANTIf the LMF yields an error message, check the following:SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.SVerify RFDS has power.SVerify RFDS status LED is green.SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).SStatus the GLI2 and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and thedevice is in the proper state (INS).3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-78RFDS TSU NAM ProgrammingThe NAM (number assignment module) information needs to beprogrammed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, orbe used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must beprogrammed with the appropriate system parameters and phone numberduring hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must berecorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.The user will only need to program the NAM for the initialinstall of the RFDS.NOTEExplanation of Parametersused when Programming theTSU NAMTable 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.Table 3-40: Definition of ParametersAccess Overload CodeSlot IndexSystem IDNetwork IDThese parameters are obtained from the switch.Primary Channel APrimary Channel BSecondary Channel ASecondary Channel BThese parameters are the channels which are to be used in operationof the system.Lock CodeSecurity CodeService LevelStation Class MarkDo NOT change.IMSI MCCIMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:OMC000>disp bts–# imsiIf the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESNand MIN must be entered into the switch as well.NOTEThis field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file.The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and theTODN is the number the subscriber calls.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-791X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYValid NAM Ranges Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields aremissing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field RangesValid RangeNAM Field Name Minimum MaximumAccess Overload Code 0 15Slot Index 0 7System ID 0 32767Network ID 0 32767Primary Channel A 25 1175Primary Channel B 25 1175Secondary Channel A 25 1175Secondary Channel B 25 1175Lock Code 0 999Security Code 0 999999Service Level 0 7Station Class Mark 0 255IMSI 11 12 0 99IMSI MCC 0 999MIN Phone Number N/A N/A3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-80Set Antenna Map DataThe antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an RFDS is notinstalled. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and isrequired if a RFDS is installed.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTSTable 3-42: Set Antenna Map DataStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit > Antenna Map > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.NOTERefer to the Util > Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTEEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-811X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSet RFDS Configuration DataIf an RFDS is installed the RFDS configuration data must be manuallyentered.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTSThe entered antenna# index numbers must correspond tothe antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.IMPORTANT*Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit > RFDS Configuration > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Click on the Add Row button to add a new antenna number. Then click in the other columns and enterthe desired data.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.NOTERefer to the Util > Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration dataexamples.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTEEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-82RFDS CalibrationThe RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RXpaths. For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at apre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measuredby the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antennadirectional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item beingused (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between thepower level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antennadirectional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at apre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by theBTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by theBTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by theCDMA communications analyzer. The difference (offset) between theRFDS keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS XCVR isthe RFDS RX calibration offset value.The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CALfile.For each RFDS TSIC, the channel frequency is determined at the lowerthird and upper third of the appropriate band using the frequencies listedin Table 3-44.Table 3-44: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel FrequenciesSystem Channel Calibration Points800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 6821.9 GHz 408 and 791Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA BBXchannels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGPrerequisitesSBBX2s are INS_TESTSCable calibration has been performedSTX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded forthe BTSSTest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibrationSTest equipment has been selected and calibrated3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/01/2001 3-831X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-45: RFDS CalibrationStep Action1Select the RFDS tab.2Click on the RFDS menu.3Click on the RFDS Calibration menu item.4Select the appropriate direction (TX/RX) in the Direction pick list.5Enter the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channels box. Separate the channel numbers with acomma or a dash if more than one channel number is entered (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 forthrough).6 Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list (use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiplecarriers).7Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the RX Branch pick list.8Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.9Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–upwindow.10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Test results are displayed in the statusreport window.11 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.12 Click on the BTS tab.13 Click on the MGLI.14 Download the CAL file which has been updated with the RFDS offset data to the selected GLI deviceby clicking on Device > Download Data from the tab menu bar and pulldown.NOTEThe MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-84Program TSU NAMFollow the procedure in Table 3-46 to program the TSU NAM. TheNAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,or be used for any type of RFDS test.PrerequisitesSMGLI is INS.STSU is powered up and has a code load.Table 3-46: Program NAM ProcedureStep Action1Select the RFDS tab.2Select the TSU tab.3Click on the TSU menu.4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41) .6Click on the OK button to display the status report.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.3
Alarms Testing08/01/2001 3-851X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAlarm VerificationThe alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in theoptimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that theSC4812ET Lite is generating the appropriate alarms.The SC 4812ET Lite is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customerdefined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interfaceto the 50–pair punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering thealarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from theactive MGLI2.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,select Util > Alarm Monitor.The following buttons are included.SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options buttonand highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels pressthe Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range ofselections) while clicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes toContinue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarmswill continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button isclicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will bedisplayed.SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitordisplay.3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-86Alarm Testing Set–upPrepare for any alarm testing by following the procedures in Table 3-47.Table 3-47: Alarm Testing PreparationStep Action1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 3-6 to interface the CDMA LMFcomputer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session.3Click on Util in the menu bar and select Alarm Monitor... from the pulldown.SAn Alarm Monitor window will open. Heat Exchanger Alarm TestTable 3-48 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.Table 3-48: Heat Exchanger AlarmStep Action1Set one of the two DC PDA heat exchanger circuit breakers to OFF. This will generate a heatexchanger alarm. Be sure that the CDMA LMF reports the correct alarm condition.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #14, BTS Relay #15, BTS Relay #16, BTS Relay#17, BTS Relay #18, with Contact Alarm Open*Clear*, respectively.3Set the circuit breaker turned off in step 1 to ON. Ensure that the alarm conditions have cleared onthe CDMA LMF with Contact Alarm Closed*Clear* for each reported BTS relay.NOTEThe heat exchanger will go through the start–up sequence.Door AlarmTable 3-49 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.Table 3-49: ACLC and Power Entry Door AlarmStep Action1Close the ACLC and power entry compartment doors on the frame. Ensure that no alarms are reportedon the CDMA LMF.2Individually open and then close the ACLC and power entry compartment door. Ensure that theCDMA LMF reports an alarm when each door is opened.3Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 contact.3
Alarms Testing – continued08/01/2001 3-871X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAC Fail AlarmTable 3-50 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.Table 3-50: AC Fail AlarmStep Action1* IMPORTANTSBack–up batteries must be installed when performing this test.STo prevent inadvertently shutting down the RF compartment electronics, the batteries should becharged before performing this test.Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to OFF.SThe CDMA LMF should report an alarm for an AC Fail condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay#23, BTS Relay #24, and BTS Relay #29 contacts, respectively.SOn the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red)LEDs should light.SOn the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should light red.2Set the ACLC MAIN circuit breaker to ON.SOn the CDMA LMF, the AC Fail alarm should clear.SOn the MAP, the MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM, and RECTIFIER FAIL LEDs shouldextinguish.SOn the rectifiers, the DC and PWR LEDs should change to green.Minor AlarmTable 3-51 gives instructions on performing a test to display a minoralarm.Table 3-51: Minor AlarmStep Action1Set the TCP switch on the MAP to OFF. This will generate a minor alarm.SThe CDMA LMF should report the minor alarm as BTS Relay #24 contacts.SThe TC DISABLE (red) and MINOR ALARM (amber) LEDs on the MAP should light.2Set the TCP switch to ON. The alarm condition indications should clear. Rectifier AlarmsThe following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiplerectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a four rectifiersystem.Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System)Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minoralarm in a three (3) rectifier system (single–carrier system). Procedures3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-88in this test are for a frame configured for single carrier operation withrectifiers installed in rectifier shelf positions 2, 3, and 4, from left toright when facing the frame.Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Single–Carrier SystemStep Action1! CAUTIONOnly perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is 125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available whenone rectifier is removed from the bus.On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.SThe DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifier in shelf position 2.SThe MINOR ALARM (amber) and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the MAP should light.SThe CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21 and BTS Relay #24contacts, respectively.2Set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.SAll alarm indications should clear on the rectifier, MAP, and CDMA LMF. Multiple Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System)Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or majoralarm in a three (3) rectifier system (single–carrier system). Proceduresin this test are for a frame configured for single carrier operation withrectifiers installed in rectifier shelf positions 2, 3, and 4, from left toright when facing the frame.Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Single–Carrier SystemStep Action1! CAUTIONOnly perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is 65amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available when tworectifiers are removed from the bus.On the ACLC, set the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker to OFF.SThe DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifiers in shelf positions 1 and 3.SThe MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on theMAP should light.SThe CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #24, and BTSRelay #29 contacts, respectively.2Set the RECT. 1/3 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.SAll alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF. 3
Alarms Testing – continued08/01/2001 3-891X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSingle Rectifier Failure (Four Rectifier System)Table 3-54 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minoralarm in a four (4) rectifier system (two–carrier system).Table 3-54: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm, Two–Carrier SystemStep Action1! CAUTIONOnly perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is 125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available whentwo rectifiers are removed from the bus in the following steps.Unseat the rectifier in shelf position 4 from its connection at the rear of the shelf, but do notcompletely remove it from the shelf.SThe rectifier 4 DC and PWR LEDs may light red momentarily and extinguish. There should be noother indications on the frame or CDMA LMF.2On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.SThe rectifier 2 DC and PWR LEDs should light red.SThe MINOR ALARM (amber) and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on the MAP should light.SThe CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21 and BTS Relay #24contacts, respectively.3 Re–seat the rectifier in shelf position 4 into its connection at the rear of the shelf.4 On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to ON.SThe rectifier DC and PWR LEDs should light green.SAll alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF. 3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-90Multiple Rectifier Failure (Four Rectifier System)Table 3-55 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or majoralarm in a four (4) rectifier system (two–carrier system).Table 3-55: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm, Two–Carrier SystemStep Action1! CAUTIONOnly perform this test if the rectifier current load displayed on the AMP indicator on the MAP is 125 amps or less. Sufficient current capability to support a greater load may not be available whentwo rectifiers are removed from the bus.On the ACLC, set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker to OFF.SThe DC and PWR LEDs should light red on the rectifiers in shelf positions 2 and 4.SThe MAJOR ALARM (red), MINOR ALARM (amber), and RECTIFIER FAIL (red) LEDs on theMAP should light.SThe CDMA LMF should report an alarm condition as BTS Relay #21, BTS Relay #24, and BTSRelay #29 contacts, respectively.2Set the RECT. 2/4 circuit breaker on the ACLC to ON.SAll alarm indications should clear on the rectifiers, MAP, and CDMA LMF. Battery Over TemperatureAlarm (Optional)Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, ordamaging battery cases when using a heat gun.CAUTIONTable 3-56 gives instructions on testing the battery over–temperaturealarm system.Table 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature AlarmStep Action1Use a low–powered heat gun to gently heat the battery over–temperature sensor (see location inFigure 3-21).! CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the cable insulation, do not hold the hot air gun closer than three (3) inches fromthe sensor.3
Alarms Testing – continued08/01/2001 3-911X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-56: Battery Over–Temperature AlarmStep Action2NOTEWhen the over–temperature alarm point is reached, an audible click will sound as DC PDA relay K1contacts engage and relay K2 contacts disengage (make–before–break operation).When the sensor is heated to approximately 51° C, a battery over–temperature alarm is generated withthe following indications.SOn the MAP, the CHARGE DISABLE LED (red) should light and the MAIN CONN. ENABLELED (green) should extinguish.SThe CDMA LMF should display an alarm condition as BTS Relay #22 contacts.3Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contacts return to normal position(K1 open and K2 closed). The following indications that alarms have cleared should occur:SOn the MAP, the CHARGE DISABLE LED (red) should extinguish and the MAIN CONN.ENABLE (green) LED should light.SThe alarm reported on CDMA LMF will clear3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-92Figure 3-21: Battery Over–Temperature SensorBus Bar6 AWG CablesBattery Overtemp SensorNegative Temperature Compensation SensorSC4812ETL0014–13
Alarms Testing – continued08/01/2001 3-931X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRectifier Over TemperatureAlarmTable 3-57 gives instructions on testing the rectifier over–temperaturealarm system.Table 3-57: Rectifier Over–Temperature AlarmStep Action1Remove the 14 tamper–resistant Torx fasteners securing the rear access panel to the rear of the frame(Figure 2-1), and remove the rear access panel.NOTEPanel fastener type can be either T–27 button head or T–30 pan head.2Looking up through the frame rear access opening, locate the rear of the MAP.3Remove the jumper plug from connector J8 on the rear panel of the MAP (Figure 3-22). Thefollowing conditions should occur:SContacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1 now closed and K2 open).SThe CDMA LMF reports an alarm condition as BTS Relay #26 contacts.4Reinstall the jumper plug in connector J8, and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared.5Reinstall the frame rear access panel, securing it with the 14 tamper–resistant Torx fasteners removedin step 1. Figure 3-22: MAP Connector J8 (Rear of MAP)SC4812ETL0021–1J4 J5 J1J12J3 J8 J9 J7J2CONNECTOR J8Before Leaving the siteIf no further operations are required after performing the alarm tests,complete the requirements in Table 5-8 before leaving the site.3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20013-94Notes3
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)Table of ContentsAutomated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX Antenna Connections 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All–inclusive Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX/RX ATP Test 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX ATP Test 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX ATP Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Tests 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FER Acceptance Test 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Notes4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction08/01/2001 4-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThe automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular FieldEngineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTSsubsystem devices using the CDMA LMF GUI environment andsupported test equipment.The operator can choose to save the results of these tests to a report file,from which ATP reports are generated for later printout.Perform the ATP test on out-of-service sectors or sites only. Because alltests are controlled via the CDMA LMF computer using the GPIBinterface from the CDMA LMF computer, only recommended testequipment supported by the CDMA LMF can be used.Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.IMPORTANT*The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectorsonly.DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models notsupported by the LMF.IMPORTANT*Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test setconnections for calibrating equipment, cables and other testset components, if required.NOTEThe CFE selects the appropriate ATP tests to run to satisfy customer andregulatory requirements for verifying cell site performance. These testscan be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmitelements. These include the GLI2, MCC, BBX2, BDC, and trunkingmodules, the LPAs, and passive components including splitters,combiners, bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receive elements.These include the MPC (for starter frames), , BBX2, MCC, and GLI2modules, and the passive components including RX filter (starterframe only), and RF cables.SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-2PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, all applicable proceduresoutlined in Chapter 3, Optimization/Calibration, must have beencompleted successfully (i.e., code load and BLO calibration).You cannot substitute test equipment with other models notsupported by the CDMA LMF.NOTEBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).SLMF is logged into the BTSSCSMs, GLI2s, BBX2s, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)have correct code load and data loadSPrimary CSM and GLI2 are INS_ACTSMCCs are INS_ACTSBBX2s are OOS-RAMSBBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloadedSTest cables are calibratedSTest equipment is selectedSTest equipment is connected for ATP testsSTest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibratedSGPIB is onBefore the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turnedOFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitterconnectors are properly terminated.All transmit connectors must be properly terminated for allATP tests.Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodilyinjury or equipment damage.WARNINGTX/RX Antenna ConnectionsRefer to Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7 for identification of the transmit andreceive antenna connections where measurement are to be taken.Directional couplers for signal sampling by the RFDS, if installed, areintegral to the SC4812ET Lite transmit and receive paths in the DRDCsand TRDCs. As a result, all ATP measurement connections are made atthe antenna connectors on the RF interface panel.4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up08/01/2001 4-368P09253A601X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRequired Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications test setBefore installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA channelskeyed.At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGYou must recalibrate the test equipment before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.NOTEAcceptance Test EquipmentSet UpFollow the steps in Table 4-1 to set up test equipment for all tests.Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control TestsStep Action1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 andFigure 3-10).2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.3If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-17 or Figure 3-18, as applicable for the testequipment being used, to connect test equipment for acceptance testing.* IMPORTANTCDMA LMF–based measurement commands factor in TX test cable loss between the RFM frame andtest equipment. No additional attenuation can be inserted as the additional losses would not befactored in. 4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance TestsPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-4All–inclusive TestsThe all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the LMF GUIenvironment. These tests execute various combinations of individualacceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification ofmultiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed forindividual test set up and initiation.There are three abbreviated acceptance tests which evaluate differentperformance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing tomeet the specific requirements for individual maintenance andperformance verification situations. The following summarizes thecoverage of each abbreviated test:SAll TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBX2s.SAll TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBX2s. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of thefollowing individual tests:–TX Mask Test–Rho Test–Pilot Time Offset Test–Code Domain Power TestSAll RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs andBBX2s. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:–FER Test4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued08/01/2001 4-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAll TX/RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-2 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit and receive test.Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select All TX/RX.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All TX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit test.Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select All TX.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.. . . continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-6Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-4 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive receive test.Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select All RX.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction08/01/2001 4-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndividual Acceptance TestsThe following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specificaspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.All testing is performed using the CDMA LMF GUI environment.TX TestingTX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output powercontrol. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set. Allmeasurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link usingall BBX2s assigned to all respective sector/antennas. Each BBX2 iskeyed up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbx level and baylevel offsets) at the CDF file carrier output power level (as specified inthe site documentation).RX TestingRX testing verifies any given receive antenna path. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set to inject a CDMA RFcarrier with all zero longcode at the specified RX frequency via theappropriate RX IN connector.RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link usingall equipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.Individual TestsSpectral Purity TX MaskThis test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generatedon each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification (as definedin IS–97) with respect to the assigned cdf file values.Waveform Quality (Rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMAmodulation spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzermeasurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and theincoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Walshcode 0).Code Domain Power/Noise FloorThis test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-8done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channelpower).BTS Frame Error RateThis test verifies the BTS receive Frame Error Rate (FER) on all TrafficChannel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate atone percent FER) at an RF input level of –119 dBm on the main RXantenna paths using all equipped MCCs and BBX2s at the site. Thediversity RX antenna paths are also tested using the lowest equippedMCC/CE ONLY.There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER readingstaken at level below –119 dBm, other than to verify thatthe FER measurement reflects changes in the RX inputsignal level.NOTE4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test08/01/2001 4-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBackgroundThis test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at aspecific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.Pilot gain will be set to 541 for each antenna, and the forward link willbe disabled for all Traffic CHannel (TCH) elements from the MCCs. TheBBX2 will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, togenerate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). RF outputwill be set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return theattenuation level of all spurious and IM products with respect to themean power of the CDMA channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth,in dB, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the following testpoints (see also Figure 4-1):SFor 800 MHz:–At least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency–At least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency–At least –60 dB @ –1980 kHz from center frequency–At least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequencySFor 1.9 GHz:–At least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency–At least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequencyThe BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will beassigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then berepeated.4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-10Spectral Purity TX MaskAcceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 4-5 to verify the transmit spectral maskspecification on all TX antenna paths using all BBXs equipped at theBTS.Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit MaskStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued08/01/2001 4-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display– 900 kHz + 900 kHzCenter Frequency ReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference– 1980 kHz+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz– 750 kHz4
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance TestPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-12BackgroundThis test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element digital waveformquality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per thecurrent CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT connector.Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elementsfrom the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 will be keyedup using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). RF output power is setat 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the pilotchannel element digital waveform quality (rho) percentage, verifyingthat the result meets system tolerances:Waveform quality (Rho) should be > 0.912.The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will beassigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then berepeated.Waveform Quality (Rho)Acceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 4-6 to verify the pilot channel elementwaveform quality (rho) on the specified TX antenna paths using BBXsequipped at the BTS.Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)Step Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select Rho.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test08/01/2001 4-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBackgroundThis test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element Pilot Time Offsetof each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the currentCDF file assignment. All tests will be performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementswill be via the TX OUT connector.The pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elementsfrom the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 will be keyedup using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). TX power output is setat 40 dBm as measured at the TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the PilotTime Offset in ms, verifying that results meet system tolerances:Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset (zero ms).The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will beassigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then berepeated.This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency andTX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP tests, however, only PilotTime Offset results are written to the ATP test report.NOTEPilot Time Offset AcceptanceTestFollow the steps in Table 4-7 to verify the Pilot Time Offset on thespecified TX antenna paths using BBXs and BDCs equipped at the BTS.Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select Pilot Time Offset.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.. . . continued on next page4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Tests – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-14Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetStep Action7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test08/01/2001 4-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBackgroundThis test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of each BBXcarrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF fileassignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test setcontrolled by the same command. All measurements are via theappropriate TX OUT connector.Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all equipped MCCswill be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh code Trafficchannel elements by enabling Orthagonal Channel Noise Source(OCNS) on all odd MCC/CEs, (maximum 32 full rate channels with anOCNS gain of 81). All even–numbered Walsh code Traffic channelelements will not have OCNS enabled, and are considered “OFF”. Allequipped MCCs will be forward–link enabled for the antenna/sectorunder test.The BBX2 will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, togenerate a CDMA carrier consisting of pilot and OCNS channels. RFoutput power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return thechannel element power (dB) of all specified Walsh channels within theCDMA spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify thefollowing parameters are met (Figure 4-2):STraffic channel element power level will be verified by calculating theratio of PILOT power to OCNS gain of all traffic channels (root sumof the square (RSS) of each OCNS gain divided by the Pilot power).This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.SNoise floor (unassigned “OFF” even numbered Walsh channels) areverified to be < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will beassigned to the current TX antenna path under test. The test will then berepeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS channels will be disabledon the specified MCC/CEs.Code Domain Power/NoiseFloor TestFollow the steps in Table 4-8 to verify the Code Domain Power/Noisefloor of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-16Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise FloorStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued08/01/2001 4-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB SPEC.Inactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:< –27 dBInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64FAILURE – DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE – EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE – EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC.Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) ExampleFigure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display ExamplesCode Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example4
RX FER Acceptance TestPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-18BackgroundThis test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all TCHscurrently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at 1% FER) at –119dBm on the main RX antenna paths. The test is performed on alldiversity RX antenna path using only the lowest equipped MCC/CE. Alltests are performed using the external calibrated test set as the signalsource controlled by the same command. All measurements are via theLMF.Pilot gain will be set to 262 for each TX antenna, and the forward linkfor all TCH elements from the MCCs will be disabled. The BBX2 willbe keyed up using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMAcarrier (with pilot channel element only). TX power output is set at +10dBm. (The BBX must be keyed in order to enable the RX receivecircuitry.)The LMF will prompt the MCC/CE under test to measure all–zerolongcode and provide the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) report on theselected active MCC on the Reverse Link for both the main and diversityRX antenna paths, verifying results meet the following specification:FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500.The BBX2 will then dekey, and if selected, the redundant BBX2 will beassigned to the current RX antenna paths under test. The test will then berepeated.4
RX FER Acceptance Test – continued08/01/2001 4-191X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFER Acceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on all RX antenna pathsusing all BBXs equipped at the BTS.Table 4-9: Test FERStep Action1Set up the test equipment for RX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBX2s and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select FER.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6From the RX Branch pick list, select the branch/branches to be tested.7Select the desired rate from the Rate Set pick list (1 = 9600, 2 = 14400).8 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.10 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
Generating an ATP ReportPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20014-20BackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated and must besaved using the Save Results button to close the status report window.The ATP report will not be updated if the status reports window is closedusing the Dismiss button.ATP ReportA separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following foreach test:STest nameSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)SBBX numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSTime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)Follow the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printablefile for the ATP report.Table 4-10: Generating an ATP ReportStep Action1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.3Click on the Report button.4Click on a column heading to start the report.5If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.6If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file, type in the pick list and click on the Savebutton. 4
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 5: Leaving the SiteTable of ContentsUpdating Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating CBSC Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing External Test Equipment 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Modules into Service with the CDMA LMF 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the site 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Notes5
Updating Calibration Data Files08/01/2001 5-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUpdating CBSC CalibrationData FilesAfter completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL fileinformation must be moved from the LMF Windows environment backto the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detailmoving files from one environment to the other.Copying CAL files from LMF to a DiskFollow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from a CDMALMF computer to a 3.5 diskette.Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a DisketteStep Action1With Windows running on the CDMA LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:.2Launch the Windows Explorer Program from your Programs menu list.3Select the applicable wlmf/cdma/bts–# folder.4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders. Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action1Log in to the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.2Place your diskette containing calibration file(s) in the workstation diskette drive.3Type in eject –q and press the Enter key.4Type in mount and press the Enter key.NOTESCheck to see that the message “floppy/no_name” is displayed on the last line.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.6Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.7Type in cd and press the Enter key.8Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).. . . continued on next page5
Back Up Calibration Data Files – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20015-268P09253A60Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action9 With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in your homedirectory by entering the following command:dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is BTSnumber).NOTEOther versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp(copy) command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited outwith a Unix text editor.10 Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the cal files have been copied.11 Type in eject and press the Enter key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site08/01/2001 5-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRemoving External TestEquipment Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-3: Remove External Test EquipmentStep Action1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the frame RF interface panel.! CAUTIONVerify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct ports on the frame. Crossedantenna cables will cause system degradation of call processing.Reset All Devices and InitializeSite RemotelyGenerally, devices in the BTS should not be left with data and codeloaded from the CDMA LMF. The configuration data and code loadsused for normal operation could be different from those stored in theCDMA LMF files. By resetting all devices, the required data and codecan be loaded from the CBSC when spans are again active.To reset all devices and have the OMCR/CBSC bring up the siteremotely, perform the procedure in Table 5-4.Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action1Terminate the CDMA LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.2NOTEIn the following step, performing Table 2-6 DC voltage measurements other than those using the MAPVOLT and AMP indicators is not necessary if DC power system components have not been replacedduring the optimization and/or ATP process.Cycle BTS power off, as specified in Table 2-9, and on, as specified in Table 2-5, Table 2-6, and step 1of Table 2-7, respectively.3Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 5-7.4Notify the OMCR/CBSC to take control of the site and download code and data to the BTS.5Verify the CBSC can communicate with the GLIs. Bringing Modules into Servicewith the CDMA LMFWhenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the siteand enable all devices at the BTS.IMPORTANT*5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20015-4If there is a reason code and/or data should or could not be loadedremotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-5 asrequired to bring BTS processor modules from OOS to INS state.Table 5-5: Bring Modules into ServiceStep Action1In the CDMA LMF GUI environment, select the device(s) you wish to enable.NOTESThe MGLI, CSM, and applicable BDC must be INS before an MCC can be enabled to INS.SProcessors which must be enabled and the order of enabling are as follows:–MGLI–GLI–CSMs–MCCs2Click on Device from the menu bar.3Click on Enable from the Device menu. A status report window is displayed.NOTEIf a BBX is selected, a transceiver parameters window is displayed to collect keying information. Donot enable the BBX.4 Click Cancel to close the transceiver parameters window, if applicable.5 Click OK to close the status report window.The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green. Terminating LMFSession/Removing TerminalPerform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMFGUI session and remove the CDMA LMF computer.Table 5-6: Remove LMFStep Action! CAUTIONDo not power down the CDMA LMF terminal without performing the procedure below.Corrupted/lost data files may result.1Log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu barand selecting Exit from the File menu list.2 Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up message which appears.3In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.4 Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears5Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued08/01/2001 5-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 5-6: Remove LMFStep Action6Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal Ethernet port from the BTS frame.7Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal serial port, the RS–232–to–GPIB interface box, and theGPIB cables as required for equipment transport. Connecting BTS T1/E1 SpansBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 or E1 span connectors removedpreviously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7 andFigure 3-7.Table 5-7: Connect T1 or E1 SpansStep Action1 Re–connect any disconnected span connectors to the Span I/O A and B boards.2If equipped, ensure the CSU is powered on.3Verify span status, ensuring the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS.Before Leaving the siteBe sure all requirements listed in Table 5-8 are completed before leavingthe site.Table 5-8: Check Before Leaving the SiteStep Action1All battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are ON (pushed in).2Both heat exchanger circuit breakers on the DC PDA are set to ON (pushed in), and the heatexchanger blowers are running.3The External Blower Assembly (EBA) power cable is connected, and the EBA is running.4The MAP power switch is set to ON, and the POWER (green) LED is lighted.5The BATT TEST switch on the MAP is set to OFF, and the BATT. TEST (amber) LED is not lighted.6No alarm conditions are being reported to the CBSC with all frame doors closed.5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20015-6Notes5
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 6: Basic TroubleshootingTable of ContentsBasic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Power Meter 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate with Communications Analyzer 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Errors 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If Every Test Fails 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify BLO Checkbox 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If Faults Are Isolated 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flowchart Prerequisites 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Power Output Fault Isolation Flowchart 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-16. Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi–FER Test Failure 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation 6-18No GPS Reference Source 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS – Fault Isolation 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX and TX paths fail 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail on a single antenna 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E) 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM LED Status Combinations 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX2 LED Status Combinations 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC24 LED Status Combinations 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Basic Troubleshooting Overview08/01/2001 6-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYOverviewThe information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference documentfor use in the field. It provides “what to do if” basic troubleshootingsuggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform per theprocedure documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the fieldand information gained from experience in Motorola labs andclassrooms.6
Troubleshooting: InstallationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-2Cannot Log into Cell-SiteTable 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnStep Action1If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 byre-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A RedLED may also indicate no termination on an external LAN connector (power entrycompartment at rear of frame).2Verify that the span line is disconnected at the Span I/O card. If the span is stillconnected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.3Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI2.4Verify the LMF is connected to the primary LAN (LAN A) at the LAN shelfbelow the SCCP cage. If LAN A is not the active LAN, force a LAN switch toLAN A by following the procedure in Table 6-2.5Verify the LMF was configured properly.6If a Xircom parallel BNC LAN interface is being used, verify the BTS-LMF cableis RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).7Verify the external LAN connectors are properly terminated (power entrycompartment at rear of frame).8Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF computer side connector when connectedto the primary LAN at the LAN shelf.9Try connecting to the Ethernet Out port in the power entry compartment (rear offrame). Use a TRB–to–BNC (triax–to–coax) adapter at the LAN connector for thisconnection.10 Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.11 Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.12 Verify GLI2 IP addresses are configured properly by following the procedure inTable 6-3. Table 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LANnStep Action1If LAN A is not the active LAN, make certain all external LAN connectors areterminated with 50Ω loads or cabled to another frame.2If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the stand–alone orstarter frame, as applicable (Table 3-6).3If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS onthe active LAN (Table 3-7).. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued08/01/2001 6-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-2: Force Ethernet LAN A to Active State as Primary LANnActionStep4Remove the 50Ω termination from the LAN B IN connector in the power entrycompartment at the rear of the stand–alone or starter frame. The CDMA LMFsession will become inactive.5Disconnect the LMF computer from the LAN shelf LAN B connector and connectit to the LAN A connector.6If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state (the cards in any cage can beselected and statused), proceed to step 13.7With the 50Ω termination still removed from the LAN B IN connector, removethe 50Ω termination from LAN B OUT connector. If more than one frame isconnected to the LAN, remove the termination from the last frame in the chain.8If the LAN was successfully forced to an active state (the cards in any cage can beselected and statused), proceed to step 13.9With the 50Ω terminations still removed from LAN B, unseat each GLI card ineach frame connected to the LAN, until all are disconnected from the shelfbackplanes.10 Reseat each GLI card until all are reconnected.11 Allow the GLIs to power up, and attempt to select and status cards in the CCPshelves. If LAN A is active, proceed to step 13.12 If LAN A is still not active, troubleshoot or continue troubleshooting followingthe procedures in Table 6-1.13 Replace the 50Ω terminations removed from the LAN B IN and OUT connectors. 6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-4Table 6-3: GLI IP Address SettingnStep Action1If it has not previously been done, establish an MMI communication session withthe GLI card as described in Table 3-11.2Enter the following command to display the IP address and subnet mask settingsfor the card:config lg0 currentA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI2>config lg0 currentlg0: IP address is set to DEFAULT (configured based on card location)lg0: netmask is set to DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)3If the IP address setting response shows an IP address rather than “Default(configured based on card location),” enter the following:config lg0 ip defaultA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI2>config lg0 ip default_param_config_lg0_ip(): param_delete(): 0x00050001lg0: ip address set to DEFAULT4If the GLI subnet mask setting does not display as “DEFAULT(255.255.255.128),” set it to default by entering the following command:config lg0 netmask defaultA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI2>config lg0 netmask default_param_config_lg0_netmask(): param_delete(): 0x00050001lg0: netmask set to DEFAULT. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued08/01/2001 6-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-3: GLI IP Address SettingnActionStep5Set the GLI route default to default by entering the following command:config route default defaultA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI2>config route default default_esh_config_route_default(): param_delete(): 0x00050001route: default gateway set to DEFAULT6NOTEChanges to the settings will not take effect unless the GLI is reset.When changes are completed, close the MMI session, and reset the GLI card.7Once the GLI is reset, re–establish MMI communication with it and issue thefollowing command to confirm its IP address and subnet mask settings:config lg0 currentA response similar to the following will be displayed:GLI2>config lg0 currentlg0: IP address is set to DEFAULT (configured based on card location)lg0: netmask is set to DEFAULT (255.255.255.128)8Repeat steps 1 through 7 for all remaining GLI2s, including those in anyadditional, inter–connected frames. Cannot Communicate withPower MeterTable 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the GPIB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipmentsetup section of Chapter 3 for details.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-6Table 6-4: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenActionStep4Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.5Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen mode, not Controlmode. Cannot Communicate withCommunications AnalyzerTable 6-5: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable setup.3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipmentsetup section for details.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 greenLEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry.6If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.7Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18.8Verify the analyzer is in Talk&Listen mode, not Control mode. 6
Troubleshooting: Download08/01/2001 6-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-6: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenStep Action1Verify T1 or E1 span is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.2Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.3Communication to MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to anyother BTS device. MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.5If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it.If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.NOTEThe card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.6Re-seat card and try again.7If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.Status it to verify the load.8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device byclicking on the device and selecting DEVICE > RESET. Cannot Download DATA to AnyDevice (Card)Table 6-7: Troubleshooting Data Download FailurenStep Action1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.2Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing thecard. Refer to Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.6
Troubleshooting: Download – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-8Cannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in theOOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to thedevice. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it isenabled.The three states that devices can be displayed:SEnabled (green, INS)SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)Table 6-8: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenStep Action1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.2If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitudedata for cell site location and GPS sync.3Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.NOTEMCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.4Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock is present; MCCs will not go INS without it.5BBXs should not be enabled for ATP tests.6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled. 6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued08/01/2001 6-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYLPA ErrorsTable 6-9: LPA ErrorsnStep Action1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers,then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a HyperTerminal connection.Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting hyperTerminaldisplay may provide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for furtherassistance.)6
Troubleshooting: CalibrationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-10Bay Level Offset CalibrationFailureTable 6-10: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setupsection) and connection is made to the proper TX port.2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the followingbands:For 1900 MHz:Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16For 800 MHz:Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=83Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset theLPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factorsfrom the power sensor.5Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 greenLEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry.6Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0dBm) Power Ref signal.7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working, the Meterdisplay will show “RES :’’8Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan. 6
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued08/01/2001 6-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCalibration Audit FailureTable 6-11: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit FailurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setupsection).2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factorsfrom the power sensor.3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA bypulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0dBm) Power Ref signal.5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.Click on the BBX(s) and select Download Code > Download Data>Enable. Re-try the audit.6Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 greenLEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and retry. 6
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault IsolationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-12OverviewThe optimization (RF path characterization or calibration) andpost-calibration (audit) procedures measure and limit-check the BTSreported transmit and receive levels of the path from each BBX2 to theback of the frame. When a fault is detected, it is specific to a receive ortransmit path. The troubleshooting process in this section determines themost probable cause of the fault.As the calibration and audit tests are performed, results are displayed inthe LMF test status report window. When faults are encountered, the testprocedure in progress continues running and displaying any furtherfaults. If it appears that there are major faults, the test can be aborted.The test results can be saved to a bts–<#>.rpt file in thewlmf\cdma\bts–<#> folder. To do this, close the test status reportwindow using the Save Results button.Closing the test status report window with the Dismissbutton will delete the test results without saving them.IMPORTANT*If a test is re–run or a new calibration, audit, or test is run and the resultsare saved, the previous test results in the bts–<#>.rpt file areoverwritten. To prevent losing previous test results in the bts–<#>.rptfile, refer to the procedure in Table 4-10 before performing furthertesting with the LMF.If there are major faults, recheck the test equipment attachments forerrors. If none are found, close the test status report window using theSave Results button, and save the contents of the resultingbts–<#>.rpt file as described in Table 4-10. Also, note other specificsabout the failure, and proceed with the fault isolation procedure.If Every Test FailsCheck the calibration equipment for proper operation by manuallysetting the signal generator output attenuator to the lowest output powersetting. Connect the output port to the spectrum analyzer RF input port.Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on theRF output. Verify that the spectrum analyzer can receive the signal,indicate the correct signal strength (accounting for the cable insertionloss), and indicate the approximate frequency.6
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation – continued08/01/2001 6-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYVerify BLO CheckboxWhen performing a calibration with the TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... functions, the Verify BLO checkbox should normally bechecked. When a calibration fails, determine if any items such asdirectional couplers or combiners have been added to the TX path. Ifadditional items have been installed in the path, try re–running thecalibration with Verify BLO unchecked. If calibration still does notpass, refer to the following paragraphs and use the TX output faultisolation flowchart to identify the most probable cause of the failure.If Faults Are IsolatedIf the fault reports are isolated between successful path checks, the rootcause of the faults most likely lies with one or more of the FieldReplaceable Unit (FRU) modules. If more than one failure was reported,look for a common denominator in the data. For example, if any TX testfails on one sector only, the BBX2 assigned to that sector (Table 1-5) is alikely cause. Also, look at the severity of the failure. If the path loss isjust marginally out of the relaxed specification limit during thepost-calibration TX audit, suspect excessive cable loss. If limits aremissed by a wide margin, suspect mis–wired cables or total devicefailure. Use the TX output fault isolation flowchart in Figure 6-1 toidentify the strongest possible cause for a failed TX test.Fault Isolation FlowchartThe flowchart covers the transmit path. Transmit paths usually fail thelower test limit, indicating excessive loss in some component in the BTSsite or mis–wiring. A failure of an upper limit usually indicates aproblem with the test setup or external equipment. Before replacing asuspected FRU, always repeat and verify the test results to rule out atransient condition. If a BBX2 fails an upper limit in the post–calibrationaudit procedure, re–calibrate and verify the out–of–tolerance conditionfor that BBX2 and/or sector before replacement.Flowchart PrerequisitesBefore entering the fault isolation sequence outlined in the flowchart, besure the following have been completed:SGLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have been downloaded with the correct ROMcode, RAM code, and data (Table 3-13, Table 3-14, and Table 3-15).SMGLI, CSMs, and MCCs are enabled (Table 3-14, Table 3-17, andTable 3-18, respectively)SBe sure the LED on the correct CCD card is solid green.SBe sure no alarms are being reported by opening an LMF alarmwindow as outlined in Table 3-47.6
Basic Troubleshooting – RF Path Fault Isolation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-14TX Power Output FaultIsolation FlowchartFigure 6-1: TX Output Fault Isolation FlowchartStartTX PowerOut of LimitsNoNo, everything failsIf equipped, does aBBX on a differentcarrier but for thesame sector pass?Yes, it passes.Likely Cause: Crossed TX cabling to include:– CIO–trunking module,– Trunking module–filter/combiner,– Filter/combiner–DRDC/TRDCCarrier LPAsAlso check: Carrier trunking moduleCIO card.Did TX Outputfail the High or Low limit?High limitfailure. Doesredundant BBXhave the sameproblem on thesame sector?Likely Cause: BBX card Attempt re–calibrationbefore replacement.NoDoes any othersector have thesame problem?Likely Cause: CIO cardCarrier trunking moduleAlso check: CIO–trunking module cablingTX filter/combiner cablingTX DRDC/TRDC cablingLikely Cause: External Power MeasurementEquipment and/or Set–up.Also check: Switch cardExternal Attenuators & Pads,Check Site Documentation.YesYesLow limitfailure.Likely Cause: CIO card not fully seatedExternal Power MeasurementEquipment and/or Set–upCrossed TX cabling to include:– CIO–trunking module,– Trunking module–filter/combiner,– Filter/combiner–DRDC/TRDCYes, it passes.If equipped, does aBBX on the samecarrier but for adifferent sectorpass?No, next BBX on same carrierfails on different sector.Likely Cause: BBX cardLoose connections onCIO–trunking module cabling,TX filter/combiner cabling, orTX DRDC/TRDC cablingAlso check: CIO cardCarrier trunking module6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP08/01/2001 6-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCannot Perform TxmaskMeasurementTable 6-12: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set theLPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or PilotTime Offset MeasurementTable 6-13: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in theCDF file.3 Re–load MGLI2 data and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset theLPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this mayindicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq.error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz.Press <Shift–avg> and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is anindication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to bere-initialized. 6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-16Cannot Perform Code DomainPower and Noise FloorMeasurementTable 6-14: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in theCDF file.3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). Cannot Perform CarrierMeasurementTable 6-15: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement FailurenStep Action1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected totest set-up.6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP08/01/2001 6-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYMulti–FER Test FailureTable 6-16: Troubleshooting Multi-FER FailurenStep Action1Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.2Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellowLED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (1 or more based on extent of failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based onextent of failure).6Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages. 6
Troubleshooting: CSM ChecklistPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-18Problem DescriptionMany Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board problems may beresolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM boards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHzReference Clock / GPSReceiver Operation If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model ABto the repair center.No GPS Reference SourceCheck the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration.RF–GPS (Local GPS) – CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installedin Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2,does not have a GPS receiver.Remote GPS (R–GPS) – Kit SGLN4132, which should be installed inboth Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver.Any incorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center.Do not attempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also,verify the GPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommendedguidelines.Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM boardback to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 orhigher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version ofCSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSMboard back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued08/01/2001 6-191X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCSM Reference SourceConfiguration Error This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed inthe field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) tofunction correctly.CSM Kit No. Hardware Configuration CSM Slot No. Reference Source ConfigurationSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSOSGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 1Primary = Remote GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO2Primary = Mate GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSOTakes Too Long for CSM toCome INSThis may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracyflag status and/or current position. Refer to the CSM system time/GPSand LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satelliteshould be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellitesshould be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verifycorrect base site position data used in “surveyed” mode. 6
SCCP Backplane TroubleshootingPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-20IntroductionThe SCCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all theSCCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possibleimproper diagnoses when problems occur.Connector FunctionalityThe following connector overview describes the major types ofbackplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This willallow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SAllow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.Span Line ConnectorThe span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primaryand secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the SCCPshelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the MasterGLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.Power Input (Return A and B connectors)Provides a 27 volt input for use by the power supply modules.Power Supply Module InterfaceEach power supply module has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP backplane. These includea VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin interface,and a +15V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver PowerModule converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 volts to beused by the SCCP shelf cards.GLI2 ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the SCCP backplane.GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese SMB connectors are located on the SCCP backplane and connectto the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and datacommunications over the Ethernet LAN between the master GLI2, theother GLI2, and the LMF.BBX2 ConnectorEach BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connectorand two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the SCCP backplane.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued08/01/2001 6-211X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCIO ConnectorsSRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX paths of theDRDCs or TRDCs at the RF interface panel (rear of frame), andthrough coaxial cables to the two MPC modules. The three “A” (main)signals go to one MPC; the three “B” (diversity) to the other. TheMPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the SCCPbackplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to theappropriate BBX2.SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, tothe backplane, and then on to the MCC24/MCC8E slots.SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24/MCC8Es.Each output is routed from the MCC24/MCC8E slot through thebackplane to the appropriate BBX2.STX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, travels through thebackplane to the CIO, through the CIO, and then throughmulti-conductor coaxial cabling to the trunking module and LPAs inthe LPA shelf.SCCP BackplaneTroubleshooting ProcedureThe following tables provide standard procedures for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP backplane. Thetables are broken down into possible problems and steps which shouldbe taken in an attempt to find the root cause.It is important to note that all steps be followed beforereplacing ANY SCCP backplane.IMPORTANT*Digital Control ProblemsNo GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)Step Action1Check the Ethernet LAN for proper connection, damage,shorts, or opens.2Be sure the LAN IN and OUT connectors in the power entrycompartment are properly terminated.3Be sure the proper IP address is entered in the Network Logintab of the LMF login screen.4Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-22Table 6-17: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)Step Action5Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.6Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)Table 6-18: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (BothGLI2s)Step Action1Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in theOMCR/CBSC data base.3Verify the span configurations set in the GLI2s match those inthe OMC–R/CBSC database (refer to Table 6-29).4Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.5Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.6Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to themaster GLI2 for proper connection and damage.Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–locatedGLI2Step Action1Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in theOMCR CBSC data base.2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, oropens.3Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2. No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMRStep Action1Visually check the master GLI2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.2Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued08/01/2001 6-231X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYNo BBX2 Control in the ShelfTable 6-21: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–locatedBBX2sStep Action1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.3Visually check BBX2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.4Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficTable 6-22: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficStep Action1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors andcables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX2, replace theBBX2 with a known good BBX2.No (or Missing) MCC24/MCC8E Channel ElementsTable 6-23: No MCC24/MCC8E Channel ElementsStep Action1Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24/MCC8E (MccType=2)2If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24/MCC8E,replace the MCC24/MCC8E with a known goodMCC24/MCC8E.–Check connectors (both module and backplane) fordamage.3If no CEs on any MCC24/MCC8E:–Verify clock reference to CIO.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-24DC Power ProblemsPotentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed tothe BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with asecond person present, acting in a safety role. Remove allrings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning thistest.WARNINGNo DC Input Voltage to SCCP Shelf Power Supply ModulesTable 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Verify DC power is applied to the frame. Determine if anycircuit breakers are tripped.* IMPORTANTIf a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the SCCPshelf and attempt to reset it.–If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breakerproblem within the frame or DC PDA.–If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defectivemodule or sub–assembly within the shelf. Perform thetests in Table 2-3 to attempt to isolate the module.2Verify that the PS1 and PS2 circuit breakers on the DC PDAare functional.3Remove the frame rear access panel (Figure 2-1), and use avoltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed tothe SCCP backplane. Measure the DC voltage level between:SThe PWR_IN_A and PWR_RTN_A contacts on theextreme right side at the rear of the backplaneSThe PWR_IN_B and PWR_RTN_B contacts on theextreme right side at the rear of the backplane–If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable orcircuit breaker problem within the frame or DC PDA.4If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the PS1and PS2 power supply module connectors.5Replace the power supply modules with a known goodmodule.6If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, an SCCPbackplane failure has occurred (possibly an open trace).6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued08/01/2001 6-251X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYNo DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,BBX2, or SwitchmoduleTable 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Verify steps outlined in Table 6-24 have been performed.2Inspect the defective module connectors (both module andbackplane) for damage.3Replace suspect module with known good module.TX and RX Signal RoutingProblemsTable 6-26: TX and RX Signal Routing ProblemsStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and backplaneconnectors for damage in all the affected board slots.2Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshootingflowchart in Figure 6-1.6
RFDS – Fault IsolationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-26IntroductionThe RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification andPost-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate andreported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through thedirectional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to thefollowing tables.All tests failTable 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests failStep Action1Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator outputattenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzerrf input port.2Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that thespectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cableinsertion loss), and the approximate frequency.3Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects tothe RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.4Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.5Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.6Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check forexternal damage.7If any boards that do not show green replace the RFDS with a known–good unit. Re–test afterreplacement. All RX and TX paths failIf every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies withthe rf converter board or the transceiver board. Replace the RFDS with aknown–good unit and retest.All tests fail on a singleantennaIf all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,make the following checks.Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna pathStep Action1Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antennaport.2Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on theRFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.. . . continued on next page6
RFDS – Fault Isolation – continued08/01/2001 6-271X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna pathStep Action3Replace the RFDS with a known–good unit.4Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.NOTEExternally route the cable to bypass suspect segment. 6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and ConnectorsPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-28Module Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator islabeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of thePWR/ALM LED on the fan module.LED Status Combinations forAll Modules (except GLI2, CSM,BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E)PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the module status indicator.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware failure.Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a completemodule failure and normal service may or may not be reduced orinterrupted.DC/DC Converter LED StatusCombinationsThe PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware problem.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued08/01/2001 6-291X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCSM LED Status Combinations PWR/ALM LEDThe CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware andsoftware/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the FlashEPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loadedfrom the Flash EPROM.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)condition.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in DUMB mode.SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. DuringSRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (IfSRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.)PWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303Figure 6-2: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-30FREQ Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. Whenboth CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by theCSMs.At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulsewidth of 153 nanoseconds.MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the developmentor factory environment, but may be used in the field fordebug/maintenance purposes.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued08/01/2001 6-311X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYGLI2 LED Status CombinationsThe GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as describedbelow and shown in Figure 6-3.The indicators and controls consist of:SFour LEDsSOne pushbuttonACTIVE LEDSolid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelfcontrol and is providing control of the digital interfaces.Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should beactive.MASTER LEDSSolid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).SOff – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARM LEDSSolid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 isperforming ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 isperforming RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).SOff – No Alarm.STATUS LEDSFlashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operatingcondition.SOn – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.SOff – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.SPANS LEDSSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-32GLI2 Pushbuttons andConnectors RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes apartial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. GLI2 will beplaced in the OOS_ROM stateMMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to beused primarily in the development or factory environment but may beused in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.MMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVE LEDSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESTATUS LEDRESETPUSHBUTTONALARM LEDSPANS LEDMASTER LEDFigure 6-3: GLI2 Front Panel Operating IndicatorsSTATUS OFF - operating normallyON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)RESETALARM OFF - operating normallyON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)SPANSMASTERMMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSAll functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasingthe switch.ON - operating normally in active cardOFF - operating normally in standby cardShows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON - active card operating normallyOFF - standby card operating normallyThe pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in thetop shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card inthe bottom shelf is in the standby mode.OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN - operating normallyYELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstateAn RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use asan MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.FW002256
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued08/01/2001 6-331X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBBX2 LED StatusCombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarmSSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarmSSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarmSLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarmSRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarmSShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarmSLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarmMCC24 LED StatusCombinationsThe MCC24 module has LED indicators and connectors as describedbelow. See Figure 6-4. Note that the figure does not show the connectorsas they are concealed by the removable lens.The LED indicators and their states are as follows:PWR/ALM LEDSRED – fault on moduleACTIVE LEDSOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsSSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsSThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development or factory environment but may be usedin the field for debugging purposes.SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development environment but may be used in the fieldfor high data rate debugging purposes. . . . continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-34PWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVEFigure 6-4: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED IndicatorsPWR/ALM OFF - operating normallyON - briefly during powerĆup and during failureąconditionsACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSRAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded butąnot enabledSLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloadedON - card is codeĆloaded and enabledą(INS_ACTIVE)COLORGREENREDRED ON - fault conditionSLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHIąbus inactive on powerĆupAn alarm is generated in the event of a failureFW00224LPA Shelf LED StatusCombinationsLPA Module LEDEach LPA module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB modulenext to the MMI connector. Interpret this LED as follows:SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normalcondition).SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting anlow input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal anddoes not constitute a failure.SFlashing RED — LPA is in alarm.6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link08/01/2001 6-351X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSpan Problems (No ControlLink)Table 6-29: Troubleshoot Control Link FailurenStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 as shown inFigure 6-5.2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 by using the Windowsdesktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI2>prompt is obtained.4At the GLI2> prompt, enter:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.5The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for theBTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-30.6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the loopedsignal is good.SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISBcabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-36Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE (P/N30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2ACTIVE LEDSTATUS LEDALARM LEDMASTER LEDMMI PortConnectorSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESPANS LEDRESETPushbuttonSet BTS Site SpanConfigurationPerform the following procedure ONLY if spanconfigurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not matchthose in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when theexact configuration data is available. Loading incorrectspan configuration data will render the site inoperable.IMPORTANT*6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued08/01/2001 6-371X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnStep Action1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicableMGLI2/GLI2 as shown in Figure 6-5.2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2, initiateone by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).3At the GLI2> prompt, enter:config ni format <option> <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option Next available options: LIST – option : Span Option E1_1 : E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16 E1_2 : E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16 E1_3 : E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16 E1_4 : E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16 T1_1 : T1_1 – D4, AMI, No ZCS T1_2 : T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS J1_1 : J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – Default J1_2 : J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS T1_3 : T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same format.4To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), asshown in the following example:> T1_2 <cr> NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI2>5An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-38Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep6If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni linkspeed <cr> The terminal will display a response similar to the following:Next available options: LIST – linkspeed : Span Linkspeed 56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)>NOTEWith this command, all active (in–use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.7To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),as shown in the following example:> 64K <cr>NOTEThe entry is case–sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typedincorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:CP: Invalid commandGLI2>8An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>9If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:config ni equal <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal span equal Next available options: LIST – span : Span a : Span A b : Span B c : Span C d : Span D e : Span E f : Span F>. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued08/01/2001 6-391X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep10 At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown inthe following example:> a <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal Next available options: LIST – equal : Span Equalization 0 : 0–131 feet (default for T1/J1) 1 : 132–262 feet 2 : 263–393 feet 3 : 394–524 feet 4 : 525–655 feet 5 : LONG HAUL 6 : 75 OHM 7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)>11 At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in thefollowing example:> 0 <cr>The terminal will display a response similar to the following:> 0The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.GLI2>12 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each in–use span.13 * IMPORTANTAfter executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal commands,the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type andlinkspeed used at the site.Press the RESET button on the MGLI2/GLI2 for changes to take effect.. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/20016-40Table 6-30: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep14 Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are asrequired:config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)The system will respond with a display similar to the following:The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A – 0–131 feet Span B – 0–131 feet Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: 64KCurrently, the link is running at 64K The actual rate is 015 If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it andrepeat steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.16 Return to step 6 of Table 6-29. 6
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix A: Data Sheets Appendix ContentAppendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Shelf A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAs A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesA
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets08/01/2001 A-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYVerification of Test EquipmentUsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-2Site ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Deliveries Per established procedures-Floor Plan Verified---Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure---Factory Data:BBX2Test PanelRFDSPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure-Site Temperature-Dress Covers/BracketsPreliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments-Frame ID DIP Switches Per site equipage-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/01/2001 A-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPre–Power and Initial PowerTestsTable A3a: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Pre–power–up tests Table 2-3Table 2-4----------Internal Cables:SpanCSMPowerEthernet ConnectorsLAN A ohmsLAN B ohmsLAN A shieldLAN B shieldLAN A IN & OUT terminatorsLAN B IN & OUT terminatorsEthernet Bootsverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedisolatedisolatedinstalledinstalledinstalled-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed-Initial power–up tests Table 2-4Table 2-6Table 2-7--Frame fansLEDsoperationalilluminatedComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-4General Optimization ChecklistTable A3b: General Optimization ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments---Preparing the LMFLoad LMF softwareCreate site–specific BTS directoryCreate HyperTerminal connectionTable 3-1Table 3-2Table 3-3----LMF–to–BTS ConnectionVerify GLI2 ethernet address settingsPing LAN APing LAN BTable 3-6Table 6-3Table 3-12Table 3-12----------Verify ROM code loads for softwarereleaseDownload/Enable MGLI2sDownload/Enable GLI2sSet Site Span ConfigurationSet CSM clock sourceEnable CSMsDownload/Enable MCC24s/MCC8EsDownload BBX2sDownload TSU (in RFDS)Program TSU NAMTable 3-13Table 3-14Table 3-14Table 6-29Table 3-16Table 3-17Table 3-15Table 3-15Table 3-39Table 3-46-Test Set Calibration Table 3-25Comments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/01/2001 A-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYGPS Receiver OperationTable A-4: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimatedor Surveyed-Current Position:latlonheightRECORD inmsec and cm alsoconvert to degmin sec-Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate:-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-6LFR Receiver OperationTable A-5: LFR Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-Station call letters M X Y Zassignment. As specified in sitedocumentation-SN ratio is > 8 dB-LFR Task State: 1frlocked to station xxxxVerify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/01/2001 A-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYLPA IM Reduction Table A-6: LPA IM ReductionParameter CommentsCARRIEROK LPA#2:13–Sector BP3–SectorSpecification-1A C1 C1 No Alarms-1B C1 C1 No Alarms-1C C1 C1 No Alarms-1D C1 C1 No Alarms-3A C2 C2 No Alarms-3B C2 C2 No Alarms-3C C2 C2 No Alarms-3D C2 C2 No AlarmsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-8TX Bay Level Offset / PowerOutput Verification for3–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier2–Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier and 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX2–1, ANT–1A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+5 dB)prior to calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = dB-BBX2–3, ANT–3A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = dB-BBX2–4, ANT–1B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+5 dB)prior to calibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = dB-BBX2–6, ANT–3B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = dB-BBX2–1, ANT–1A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost–calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = dB-carrier 1BBX2–3, ANT–3A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = dB-BBX2–4, ANT–1B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost–calibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = dB-carrier 2BBX2–6, ANT–3B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/01/2001 A-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY2–Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX2–1, ANT–1A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = dB-BBX2–3, ANT–3A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = dB-BBX2–4, ANT–1B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = dB-BBX2–6, ANT–3B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = dB-BBX2–1, ANT–1A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1A = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2A = dB-carrier 1BBX2–3, ANT–3A = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3A = dB-BBX2–4, ANT–1B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1B = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX2–5, ANT–2B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2B = dB-carrier 2BBX2–6, ANT–3B = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3B = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-10TX Antenna VSWRTable A-9: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR – Antenna 1A < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 2A < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 3A < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 1B < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 2B < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 3B < (1.5 : 1)Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/01/2001 A-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRX Antenna VSWRTable A-10: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR – Antenna 1A < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 2A < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 3A < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 1B < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 2B < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna 3B < (1.5 : 1)Comments:_________________________________________________________Alarm VerificationTable A-11: CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data-Verify CDI alarm inputoperation per Table 3-5. BTS Relay #XX –Contact AlarmSets/ClearsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-12NotesA
Site Serial Number Check List08/01/2001 A-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYDate SiteSCCP ShelfSite I/O A & BSCCP ShelfCSM–1CSM–2HSO/LFRCCD–1CCD–2AMR–1AMR–2MPC–1MPC–2Fans 1–2GLI2–1GLI2–2BBX2–1BBX2–2BBX2–3BBX2–4BBX2–5BBX2–6BBX2–R1MCC24–1MCC24–2MCC24–3MCC24–4CIOSWITCHPS–1PS–2A
Site Serial Number Check List – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001A-14LPAsLPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3CLPA 3DA
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix Appendix ContentAppendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesB
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix08/01/2001 B-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUsage & BackgroundPeriodic maintenance of a site may also mandate re–optimization ofspecific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines isincluded in the following tables.Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed inthe tables below must be performed anytime a RF cableassociated with it is replaced.IMPORTANT*BTS FrameTable B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTSItem Replaced Optimize:SCCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to the SCCPshelfMulticoupler/Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths forthe SCCP shelf in the BTS framesBBX2 board RX and TX paths of the affected SCCPshelf / BBX2 boardCIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affectedCDMA carrierAny LPA Module The affected sector TX path.DRDC or TRDC All affected sector RX and TX pathsRFDS The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths(MONFWD/GENFWD)Inter-frame CablingOptimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cablingbetween BTS frames.Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame CablingItem Replaced Optimize:Expansion frame–to–BTSframe (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RX pathsExpansion frame–to–BTSframe (TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX pathsB
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001B-2Detailed Optimization/ATP TestMatrixTable B-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to beperformed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. Itis also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMFuntil full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.Not every procedure required to bring the site back on lineis indicated in Table B-3. It is meant to be used as aguideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiarenough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure tounderstand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, andBTS site preparation will be required before performing theTable # procedures referenced.IMPORTANT*Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directionalcouplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibrationaudit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TXpath calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to berepeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting iswarranted.Whenever any SCCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that onlypower to the SCCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the breakersupplying that shelf.If any significant change in signal level results from anycomponent being replaced in the RX or TX signal flowpaths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TXcalibration audit command.NOTEWhen the CIO is replaced, the SCCP shelf remains powered up. TheBBX2 boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into theiroriginal slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TXcalibration audits should then be performed.B
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued08/01/2001 B-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable B-3: SC 4812ET Lite BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTbl#DescriptionDirectional Coupler (RX)Directional Coupler (TX)RX FilterRX CablesTX CablesMulticoupler/PreselectorCIOSCCP BackplaneBBX2MCC24/MCC8ECSMLFR/HSOGPSGLI2LPALPA Filter BandpassPower Supply Modules (See Note)Switch CardLPA Combiner Filter 2:1Table 2-1Initial Boards/ModulesInstall, PreliminaryOperations, CDF SiteEquipage; etc.DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDTable 2-6 Initial Power-up D DTable 3-6/Table 3-7 Start LMF D DTable 3-14/Table 3-15 Download Code DDDD DTable 3-17 Enable CSMs D DTable 3-20 GPS &HSO Initialization /Verification D D D DTable 3-21 LFR Initialization /Verification D DTable 3-34/Table 3-35 TX Path Calibration D D DTable 3-36 Download Offsets to BBX2 D DTable 3-37 TX Path Calibration Audit D D D D D D D DTable 3-45 RFDS Path Calibration D D D DDDDD D D D DTable 4-5 Spectral Purity TX Mask D D D D D DTable 4-6 Waveform Quality (rho) D D D D D D D DTable 4-7 Pilot Time Offset D D D D D D D DTable 4-8 Code Domain Power /Noise Floor DDDTable 4-9 FER Test DDDDDNOTEReplace power supply modules one card at a time so that power to the SCCP shelf is not lost. If powerto the shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.B
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001B-4NotesB
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations Appendix ContentBBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesC
BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations08/01/2001 C-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUsage & BackgroundTable C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domainchannel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and theBBX2 Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultantRF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in thetable. The table assumes that the BBX2 Bay Level Offset (BLO) valueshave been calculated.As an illustration, consider a BBX2 keyed up to produce a CDMAcarrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled).Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX2 Gain Set Point is shownto correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33541 –––––––43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3533 –––––––43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2525 –––––––43 42 41 40 39517 –––––––42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9509 –––––––42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8501 –––––––42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1461 – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9453 – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8445 –––––43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6437 –––––43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4429 –––––43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3421 –––––43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1413 –––––43 42 41 40 39 38 37405 –––––42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 . . . continued on next pageC
BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001C-2Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb333435363738394041424344381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1366 – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9358 – – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1326 – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9318 – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2294 – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34286 – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8278 –43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5270 –43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3262 –43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33254 –42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 32.7246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 32.4238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 32.9 31.9222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 32.6 31.6214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2 31.2C
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information Appendix ContentCDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American PCS Bands D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 MHz PCS Channels D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesD
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanPCS Bands08/01/2001 D-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionProgramming of each of the BTS BBX2 synthesizers is performed by theBTS GLI2s via the CHI bus. This programming data determines thetransmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) foreach BBX2.1900 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system). FREQ (MHz)RX TX2751175CHANNEL1863.759251851.25251871.25425675 1883.751896.251908.751943.751931.251951.251963.751976.251988.75ADBEFCFW00463Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001D-2Calculating 1900 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 1930 + 0.05 * 262 = 1943.10 MHzSRX = TX – 80Example: Channel 262RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHzActual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequencyplan.Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. Theactual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band onboth sides of the carrier.Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier andthe nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1931.25 1851.2550 0032 1932.50 1852.5075 004B 1933.75 1853.75100 0064 1935.00 1855.00125 007D 1936.25 1856.25150 0096 1937.50 1857.50175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50275 0113 1943.75 1863.75300 012C 1945.00 1865.00325 0145 1946.25 1866.25350 015E 1947.50 1867.50375 0177 1948.75 1868.75400 0190 1950.00 1870.00425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00525 020D 1956.25 1876.25550 0226 1957.50 1877.50575 023F 1958.75 1878.75. . . continued on next pageD
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continued08/01/2001 D-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency600 0258 1960.00 1880.00625 0271 1961.25 1881.25650 028A 1962.50 1882.50675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50775 0307 1968.75 1888.75800 0320 1970.00 1890.00825 0339 1971.25 1891.25850 0352 1972.50 1892.50875 036B 1973.75 1893.75900 0384 1975.00 1895.00925 039D 1976.25 1896.25950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50975 03CF 1978.75 1898.751000 03E8 1980.00 1900.001025 0401 1981.25 1901.251050 041A 1982.50 1902.501075 0433 1983.75 1903.751100 044C 1985.00 1905.001125 0465 1986.25 1906.251150 047E 1987.50 1807.501175 0497 1988.75 1908.75 D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001D-4800 MHz CDMA ChannelsFigure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellulartelephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).RX FREQ(MHz)991 1023 1 333 334 666 667 716 717 799 CHANNELOVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDSOVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS824.040825.000825.030834.990835.020844.980845.010846.480846.510848.970869.040870.000870.030879.990880.020889.980890.010891.480891.510893.970TX FREQ(MHz)1013694 689 311 356 644 739 777 CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDCDMA WIRELINE (B) BANDFW00402Calculating 800 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:SChannels 1–777TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHzSChannels 1013–1023TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)Example: Channel 1015TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHzSRX = TX – 45 MHzExample: Channel 262RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHzTable D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency1 0001 870.0300 825.030025 0019 870.7500 825.7500. . . continued on next pageD
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continued08/01/2001 D-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency50 0032 871.5000 826.500075 004B 872.2500 827.2500100 0064 873.0000 828.0000125 007D 873.7500 828.7500150 0096 874.5000 829.5000175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000275 0113 878.2500 833.2500300 012C 879.0000 834.0000325 0145 879.7500 834.7500350 015E 880.5000 835.5000375 0177 881.2500 836.2500400 0190 882.0000 837.0000425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000525 020D 885.7500 840.7500550 0226 886.5000 841.5000575 023F 887.2500 842.2500600 0258 888.0000 843.0000625 0271 888.7500 843.7500650 028A 889.5000 844.5000675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000775 0307 893.2500 848.2500NOTEChannel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.1013 03F5 869.7000 824.70001023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000 D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001D-6NotesD
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information Appendix ContentPN Offset Programming Information E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Background E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Usage E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesE
PN Offset Programming Information08/01/2001 E-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPN Offset BackgroundAll channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHzCDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walshcode functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair ofPN sequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBX2s, where thecorresponding I & Q registers reside.The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown ofthis information is found in Table E-1.PN Offset Usage There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important todetermine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTSfunctionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for theprocessing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type ofmobile meeting IS–97 specifications.Observe the following guidelines:SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), theFineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 tableMUST be used.If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj hasbeen set for the 14 chip table.SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdjhas been set for the 13 chip table.CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMALor HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. Ifnecessary, convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimalbefore comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.IMPORTANT*–If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values fromthe 13 chip delay table.–If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offsetproblem, (any mobile meeting the IS–97 specification), use the 14chip delay table.E
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-2If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrongFineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur.This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”over several Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh codethat it was assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidenceof smearing is usually identified by Walsh channels not atcorrect levels or present when not selected in the CodeDomain Power Test.IMPORTANT*E
PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/01/2001 E-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3 29673 25581 73E9 63ED 4096 4096 1000 10001 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D 16146 29082 3F12 719A 9167 1571 23CF 06232 4700 17398 125C 43F6 2350 8699 092E 21FB 22417 7484 5791 1D3C3 14406 26333 3846 66DD 7203 32082 1C23 7D52 966 6319 03C6 18AF4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB 19657 18921 4CC9 49E9 14189 2447 376D 098F5 17025 2256 4281 08D0 28816 1128 7090 0468 29150 24441 71DE 5F796 14745 18651 3999 48DB 19740 27217 4D1C 6A51 18245 27351 4745 6AD77 2783 1094 0ADF 0446 21695 547 54BF 0223 1716 23613 06B4 5C3D8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2 2916 10601 0B64 2969 11915 29008 2E8B 71509 12407 13841 3077 3611 18923 21812 49EB 5534 20981 5643 51F5 160B10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17 27855 28727 6CCF 7037 24694 28085 6076 6DB511 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA 24350 9445 5F1E 24E5 11865 18200 2E59 471812 18523 30999 485B 7917 30205 29367 75FD 72B7 6385 21138 18F1 529213 29920 22420 74E0 5794 14960 11210 3A70 2BCA 27896 21937 6CF8 55B114 25184 20168 6260 4EC8 12592 10084 3130 2764 25240 25222 6298 628615 26282 12354 66AA 3042 13141 6177 3355 1821 30877 109 789D 006D16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3 27167 23525 6A1F 5BE5 30618 6028 779A 178C17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A 7770 5917 1E5A 171D 26373 22034 6705 561218 23026 10395 59F2 289B 11513 23153 2CF9 5A71 314 15069 013A 3ADD19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83 30409 30973 76C9 78FD 17518 4671 446E 123F20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07 2025 31679 07E9 7BBF 21927 30434 55A7 76E221 1557 22087 0615 5647 21210 25887 52DA 651F 2245 11615 08C5 2D5F22 30262 2077 7636 081D 15131 18994 3B1B 4A32 18105 19838 46B9 4D7E23 18000 13758 4650 35BE 9000 6879 2328 1ADF 8792 14713 2258 397924 20056 11778 4E58 2E02 10028 5889 272C 1701 21440 241 53C0 00F125 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7 18023 18647 4667 48D7 15493 24083 3C85 5E1326 17437 7184 441D 1C10 29662 3592 73DE 0E08 26677 7621 6835 1DC527 17438 2362 441E 093A 8719 1181 220F 049D 11299 19144 2C23 4AC828 5102 25840 13EE 64F0 2551 12920 09F7 3278 12081 1047 2F31 041729 9302 12177 2456 2F91 4651 23028 122B 59F4 23833 26152 5D19 662830 17154 10402 4302 28A2 8577 5201 2181 1451 20281 22402 4F39 578231 5198 1917 144E 077D 2599 19842 0A27 4D82 10676 21255 29B4 530732 4606 17708 11FE 452C 2303 8854 08FF 2296 16981 30179 4255 75E333 24804 10630 60E4 2986 12402 5315 3072 14C3 31964 7408 7CDC 1CF034 17180 6812 431C 1A9C 8590 3406 218E 0D4E 26913 115 6921 007335 10507 14350 290B 380E 17749 7175 4555 1C07 14080 1591 3700 063736 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7 16902 23367 4206 5B47 23842 1006 5D22 03EE37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB 11925 32489 2E95 7EE9 27197 32263 6A3D 7E0738 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C 27824 1326 6CB0 052E 22933 1332 5995 053439 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA 22053 9949 5625 26DD 30220 12636 760C 315C40 10030 2010 272E 07DA 5015 1005 1397 03ED 12443 4099 309B 100341 16984 25936 4258 6550 8492 12968 212C 32A8 19854 386 4D8E 018242 14225 28531 3791 6F73 18968 31109 4A18 7985 14842 29231 39FA 722F43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0 25115 5976 621B 1758 15006 25711 3A9E 646F44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB 26607 28761 67EF 7059 702 10913 02BE 2AA145 30100 25589 7594 63F5 15050 32710 3ACA 7FC6 21373 8132 537D 1FC446 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51 3961 22548 0F79 5814 23874 20844 5D42 516C47 14199 28198 3777 6E26 19051 14099 4A6B 3713 3468 13150 0D8C 335E48 17637 13947 44E5 367B 29602 21761 73A2 5501 31323 18184 7A5B 470849 23081 8462 5A29 210E 31940 4231 7CC4 1087 29266 19066 7252 4A7A50 5099 9595 13EB 257B 22565 23681 5825 5C81 16554 29963 40AA 750B. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-4Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E 28195 2335 6E23 091F 22575 6605 582F 19CD52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950 3557 7336 0DE5 1CA8 31456 29417 7AE0 72E953 7699 29415 1E13 72E7 24281 30543 5ED9 774F 8148 22993 1FD4 59D154 19339 20610 4B8B 5082 29717 10305 7415 2841 19043 27657 4A63 6C0955 28212 6479 6E34 194F 14106 17051 371A 429B 25438 5468 635E 155C56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD 26649 23386 6819 5B5A 10938 8821 2ABA 227557 19715 18426 4D03 47FA 30545 9213 7751 23FD 2311 20773 0907 512558 14901 22726 3A35 58C6 19658 11363 4CCA 2C63 7392 4920 1CE0 133859 20160 5247 4EC0 147F 10080 17411 2760 4403 30714 5756 77FA 167C60 22249 29953 56E9 7501 31396 29884 7AA4 74BC 180 28088 00B4 6DB861 26582 5796 67D6 16A4 13291 2898 33EB 0B52 8948 740 22F4 02E462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD 23592 28386 5C28 6EE2 16432 23397 4030 5B6563 15127 4528 3B17 11B0 19547 2264 4C5B 08D8 9622 19492 2596 4C2464 15274 5415 3BAA 1527 7637 17583 1DD5 44AF 7524 26451 1D64 675365 23149 10294 5A6D 2836 31974 5147 7CE6 141B 1443 30666 05A3 77CA66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296 8170 8523 1FEA 214B 1810 15088 0712 3AF067 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6 13526 3923 34D6 0F53 6941 26131 1B1D 661368 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A 19383 5381 4BB7 1505 3238 15969 0CA6 3E6169 10620 13814 297C 35F6 5310 6907 14BE 1AFB 8141 24101 1FCD 5E2570 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6 7989 8427 1F35 20EB 10408 12762 28A8 31DA71 27966 795 6D3E 031B 13983 20401 369F 4FB1 18826 19997 498A 4E1D72 12479 9774 30BF 262E 18831 4887 498F 1317 22705 22971 58B1 59BB73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3 768 24909 0300 614D 3879 12560 0F27 311074 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64 22511 1586 57EF 0632 21359 31213 536F 79ED75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5 22834 19046 5932 4A66 30853 18780 7885 495C76 17888 21283 45E0 5323 8944 26541 22F0 67AD 18078 16353 469E 3FE177 13117 16905 333D 4209 18510 28472 484E 6F38 15910 12055 3E26 2F1778 7506 7062 1D52 1B96 3753 3531 0EA9 0DCB 20989 30396 51FD 76BC79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C 13813 3766 35F5 0EB6 28810 24388 708A 5F4480 31109 25575 7985 63E7 27922 32719 6D12 7FCF 30759 1555 7827 061381 29755 14244 743B 37A4 27597 7122 6BCD 1BD2 18899 13316 49D3 340482 26711 28053 6857 6D95 26107 30966 65FB 78F6 7739 31073 1E3B 796183 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8 30214 15204 7606 3B64 6279 6187 1887 182B84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6 9304 2547 2458 09F3 9968 21644 26F0 548C85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E 24511 8111 5FBF 1FAF 8571 9289 217B 244986 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7 11584 17351 2D40 43C7 4143 4624 102F 121087 23466 174 5BAA 00AE 11733 87 2DD5 0057 19637 467 4CB5 01D388 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA 7966 12765 1F1E 31DD 11867 18133 2E5B 46D589 25798 2320 64C6 0910 12899 1160 3263 0488 7374 1532 1CCE 05FC90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49 14067 25368 36F3 6318 10423 1457 28B7 05B191 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1 14012 24804 36BC 60E4 9984 9197 2700 23ED92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C 23951 1302 5D8F 0516 7445 13451 1D15 348B93 21508 1826 5404 0722 10754 913 2A02 0391 4133 25785 1025 64B994 26338 30853 66E2 7885 13169 29310 3371 727E 22646 4087 5876 0FF795 17186 15699 4322 3D53 8593 20629 2191 5095 15466 31190 3C6A 79D696 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D 11231 19250 2BDF 4B32 2164 8383 0874 20BF97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8 1954 12500 07A2 30D4 16380 12995 3FFC 32C398 25390 18163 632E 46F3 12695 27973 3197 6D45 15008 27438 3AA0 6B2E99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B 26537 22201 67A9 56B9 31755 9297 7C0B 2451100 9620 8670 2594 21DE 4810 4335 12CA 10EF 31636 1676 7B94 068C. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/01/2001 E-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A 23933 645 5D7D 0285 25414 12596 6346 3134102 16876 4407 41EC 1137 8438 18087 20F6 46A7 7102 19975 1BBE 4E07103 17034 1163 428A 048B 8517 19577 2145 4C79 20516 20026 5024 4E3A104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7 28314 23015 6E9A 59E7 19495 8958 4C27 22FE105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55 25692 16406 645C 4016 17182 19143 431E 4AC7106 8382 8978 20BE 2312 4191 4489 105F 1189 11572 17142 2D34 42F6107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB 2812 32729 0AFC 7FD9 25570 19670 63E2 4CD6108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A 712 1565 02C8 061D 6322 30191 18B2 75EF109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE 6517 15703 1975 3D57 8009 5822 1F49 16BE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E 7841 3111 1EA1 0C27 26708 22076 6854 563C111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74 25918 10170 653E 27BA 6237 606 185D 025E112 8521 25094 2149 6206 16756 12547 4174 3103 32520 9741 7F08 260D113 30232 23380 7618 5B54 15116 11690 3B0C 2DAA 31627 9116 7B8B 239C114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE 23902 5463 5D5E 1557 3532 12705 0DCC 31A1115 27116 22821 69EC 5925 13558 25262 34F6 62AE 24090 17502 5E1A 445E116 4238 31634 108E 7B92 2119 15817 0847 3DC9 20262 18952 4F26 4A08117 5128 4403 1408 1133 2564 18085 0A04 46A5 18238 15502 473E 3C8E118 14846 689 39FE 02B1 7423 20324 1CFF 4F64 2033 17819 07F1 459B119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5 6512 31470 1970 7AEE 25566 4370 63DE 1112120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5 17680 31726 4510 7BEE 25144 31955 6238 7CD3121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3 15862 20965 3DF6 51E5 29679 30569 73EF 7769122 13811 22338 35F3 5742 19241 11169 4B29 2BA1 5064 7350 13C8 1CB6123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E 24953 13775 6179 35CF 27623 26356 6BE7 66F4124 1213 22096 04BD 5650 21390 11048 538E 2B28 13000 32189 32C8 7DBD125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60 1145 11568 0479 2D30 31373 1601 7A8D 0641126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7 27727 23023 6C4F 59EF 13096 19537 3328 4C51127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD 6044 19554 179C 4C62 26395 25667 671B 6443128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8 3861 468 0F15 01D4 15487 4415 3C7F 113F129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880 13656 3136 3558 0C40 29245 2303 723D 08FF130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE 11565 16223 2D2D 3F5F 26729 16362 6869 3FEA131 594 13555 0252 34F3 297 21573 0129 5445 12568 28620 3118 6FCC132 25804 8789 64CC 2255 12902 24342 3266 5F16 24665 6736 6059 1A50133 31013 24821 7925 60F5 27970 32326 6D42 7E46 8923 2777 22DB 0AD9134 32585 21068 7F49 524C 28276 10534 6E74 2926 19634 24331 4CB2 5F0B135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93 22482 28789 57D2 7075 29141 9042 71D5 2352136 17231 5321 434F 14C9 28791 17496 7077 4458 73 107 0049 006B137 31554 551 7B42 0227 15777 20271 3DA1 4F2F 26482 4779 6772 12AB138 8764 12115 223C 2F53 4382 22933 111E 5995 6397 13065 18FD 3309139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326 20439 2451 4FD7 0993 29818 30421 747A 76D5140 13428 1991 3474 07C7 6714 19935 1A3A 4DDF 8153 20210 1FD9 4EF2141 17658 14404 44FA 3844 8829 7202 227D 1C22 302 5651 012E 1613142 13475 17982 34A3 463E 19329 8991 4B81 231F 28136 31017 6DE8 7929143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E 31479 9783 7AF7 2637 29125 30719 71C5 77FF144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A 24994 1485 61A2 05CD 8625 23104 21B1 5A40145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F 22969 25403 59B9 633B 26671 7799 682F 1E77146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36 11646 7579 2D7E 1D9B 6424 17865 1918 45C9147 1377 29094 0561 71A6 21344 14547 5360 38D3 12893 26951 325D 6947148 28654 653 6FEE 028D 14327 20346 37F7 4F7A 18502 25073 4846 61F1149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3 3175 27477 0C67 6B55 7765 32381 1E55 7E7D150 16770 23588 4182 5C24 8385 11794 20C1 2E12 25483 16581 638B 40C5. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-6Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E 7363 5439 1CC3 153F 15408 32087 3C30 7D57152 25685 31060 6455 7954 25594 15530 63FA 3CAA 6414 97 190E 0061153 21356 30875 536C 789B 10678 29297 29B6 7271 8164 7618 1FE4 1DC2154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8 18026 5748 466A 1674 10347 93 286B 005D155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1 14483 25036 3893 61CC 29369 16052 72B9 3EB4156 22898 9586 5972 2572 11449 4793 2CB9 12B9 10389 14300 2895 37DC157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8 21128 10492 5288 28FC 24783 11129 60CF 2B79158 30010 30389 753A 76B5 15005 30054 3A9D 7566 18400 6602 47E0 19CA159 2365 7298 093D 1C82 21838 3649 554E 0E41 22135 14460 5677 387C160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6 25797 9467 64C5 24FB 4625 25458 1211 6372161 29740 23137 742C 5A61 14870 25356 3A16 630C 22346 15869 574A 3DFD162 5665 24597 1621 6015 23232 32310 5AC0 7E36 2545 27047 09F1 69A7163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05 32747 25534 7FEB 63BE 7786 26808 1E6A 68B8164 1680 7764 0690 1E54 840 3882 0348 0F2A 20209 7354 4EF1 1CBA165 25861 14518 6505 38B6 25426 7259 6352 1C5B 26414 27834 672E 6CBA166 25712 21634 6470 5482 12856 10817 3238 2A41 1478 11250 05C6 2BF2167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A 29766 5773 7446 168D 15122 552 3B12 0228168 26887 26454 6907 6756 25939 13227 6553 33AB 24603 27058 601B 69B2169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42 28040 7969 6D88 1F21 677 14808 02A5 39D8170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A 5748 4525 1674 11AD 13705 9642 3589 25AA171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F 639 18483 027F 4833 13273 32253 33D9 7DFD172 31555 758 7B43 02F6 27761 379 6C71 017B 14879 26081 3A1F 65E1173 29171 16528 71F3 4090 26921 8264 6929 2048 6643 21184 19F3 52C0174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97 10236 27127 27FC 69F7 23138 11748 5A62 2DE4175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0 2908 5104 0B5C 13F0 28838 32676 70A6 7FA4176 30270 17698 763E 4522 15135 8849 3B1F 2291 9045 2425 2355 0979177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5 11094 24150 2B56 5E56 10792 19455 2A28 4BFF178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA 3091 14317 0C13 37ED 25666 19889 6442 4DB1179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F 28406 19955 6EF6 4DF3 11546 18177 2D1A 4701180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78 7023 10172 1B6F 27BC 15535 2492 3CAF 09BC181 15873 26696 3E01 6848 20176 13348 4ED0 3424 16134 15086 3F06 3AEE182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B 30481 18609 7711 48B1 8360 30632 20A8 77A8183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7 26763 22879 688B 595F 14401 27549 3841 6B9D184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6 6676 15971 1A14 3E63 26045 6911 65BD 1AFF185 22977 9737 59C1 2609 32048 23864 7D30 5D38 24070 9937 5E06 26D1186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6 27701 4819 6C35 12D3 30300 2467 765C 09A3187 10637 30643 298D 77B3 17686 30181 4516 75E5 13602 25831 3522 64E7188 25454 13230 636E 33AE 12727 6615 31B7 19D7 32679 32236 7FA7 7DEC189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9 9305 25960 2459 6568 16267 12987 3F8B 32BB190 6368 2055 18E0 0807 3184 19007 0C70 4A3F 9063 11714 2367 2DC2191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F 24247 24355 5EB7 5F23 19487 19283 4C1F 4B53192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC 3865 7926 0F19 1EF6 12778 11542 31EA 2D16193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD 11738 20802 2DDA 5142 27309 27928 6AAD 6D18194 889 6074 0379 17BA 20588 3037 506C 0BDD 12527 26637 30EF 680D195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D 30874 29498 789A 733A 953 10035 03B9 2733196 20520 15880 5028 3E08 10260 7940 2814 1F04 15958 10748 3E56 29FC197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93 31618 27125 7B82 69F5 6068 24429 17B4 5F6D198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA 20223 4333 4EFF 10ED 23577 29701 5C19 7405199 21639 816 5487 0330 31635 408 7B93 0198 32156 14997 7D9C 3A95200 31120 22309 7990 5725 15560 26030 3CC8 65AE 32709 32235 7FC5 7DEB. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/01/2001 E-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B 1849 30593 0739 7781 23557 30766 5C05 782E202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316 8161 6539 1FE1 198B 17638 5985 44E6 1761203 17429 10460 4415 28DC 29658 5230 73DA 146E 3545 6823 0DD9 1AA7204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6 10865 8795 2A71 225B 9299 20973 2453 51ED205 17808 20277 4590 4F35 8904 27046 22C8 69A6 6323 10197 18B3 27D5206 30068 19988 7574 4E14 15034 9994 3ABA 270A 19590 9618 4C86 2592207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D 18736 17154 4930 4302 7075 22705 1BA3 58B1208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5 26360 28998 66F8 7146 14993 5234 3A91 1472209 20371 6024 4F93 1788 30233 3012 7619 0BC4 19916 12541 4DCC 30FD210 13829 20520 3605 5028 19154 10260 4AD2 2814 6532 8019 1984 1F53211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF 6683 28763 1A1B 705B 17317 22568 43A5 5828212 25732 26063 6484 65CF 12866 31963 3242 7CDB 16562 5221 40B2 1465213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43 9932 31517 26CC 7B1D 26923 25216 692B 6280214 5187 6614 1443 19D6 23537 3307 5BF1 0CEB 9155 1354 23C3 054A215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA 31881 5485 7C89 156D 20243 29335 4F13 7297216 28242 5511 6E52 1587 14121 17663 3729 44FF 32391 6682 7E87 1A1A217 6243 17119 1863 42DF 24033 28499 5DE1 6F53 20190 26128 4EDE 6610218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0 20750 8032 510E 1F60 27564 29390 6BAC 72CE219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E 10673 15807 29B1 3DBF 20869 8852 5185 2294220 13256 4660 33C8 1234 6628 2330 19E4 091A 9791 6110 263F 17DE221 18472 13881 4828 3639 9236 21792 2414 5520 714 11847 02CA 2E47222 25945 16819 6559 41B3 25468 28389 637C 6EE5 7498 10239 1D4A 27FF223 31051 6371 794B 18E3 28021 16973 6D75 424D 23278 6955 5AEE 1B2B224 1093 24673 0445 6061 21490 32268 53F2 7E0C 8358 10897 20A6 2A91225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7 23218 17903 5AB2 45EF 9468 14076 24FC 36FC226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719 15773 23984 3D9D 5DB0 23731 12450 5CB3 30A2227 29833 5957 7489 1745 27540 17822 6B94 459E 25133 8954 622D 22FA228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D 9073 22682 2371 589A 2470 19709 09A6 4CFD229 24813 22155 60ED 568B 24998 25977 61A6 6579 17501 1252 445D 04E4230 47 15050 002F 3ACA 20935 7525 51C7 1D65 24671 15142 605F 3B26231 3202 16450 0C82 4042 1601 8225 0641 2021 11930 26958 2E9A 694E232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB 31729 30785 7BF1 7841 9154 8759 23C2 2237233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0 24390 1008 5F46 03F0 7388 12696 1CDC 3198234 25297 17153 62D1 4301 24760 28604 60B8 6FBC 3440 11936 0D70 2EA0235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9 24103 20680 5E27 50C8 27666 25635 6C12 6423236 28519 30581 6F67 7775 26211 30086 6663 7586 22888 17231 5968 434F237 4991 3600 137F 0E10 22639 1800 586F 0708 13194 22298 338A 571A238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001 24225 17980 5EA1 463C 26710 7330 6856 1CA2239 17728 671 4540 029F 8864 20339 22A0 4F73 7266 30758 1C62 7826240 14415 20774 384F 5126 19959 10387 4DF7 2893 15175 6933 3B47 1B15241 30976 24471 7900 5F97 15488 25079 3C80 61F7 15891 2810 3E13 0AFA242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD 13188 31578 3384 7B5A 26692 8820 6844 2274243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC 29931 9694 74EB 25DE 14757 7831 39A5 1E97244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE 9580 12639 256C 315F 28757 19584 7055 4C80245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521 1900 23724 076C 5CAC 31342 2944 7A6E 0B80246 8307 26143 2073 661F 16873 32051 41E9 7D33 19435 19854 4BEB 4D8E247 12918 13359 3276 342F 6459 21547 193B 542B 2437 10456 0985 28D8248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A 9821 1077 265D 0435 20573 17036 505D 428C249 24873 13747 6129 35B3 24900 21733 6144 54E5 18781 2343 495D 0927250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE 31435 13823 7ACB 35FF 18948 14820 4A04 39E4. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-8Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420 6952 528 1B28 0210 23393 1756 5B61 06DC252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585 13599 19710 351F 4CFE 5619 19068 15F3 4A7C253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF 22242 18507 56E2 484B 17052 28716 429C 702C254 16820 4951 41B4 1357 8410 18327 20DA 4797 21292 31958 532C 7CD6255 22479 749 57CF 02ED 31287 20298 7A37 4F4A 2868 16097 0B34 3EE1256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3 3425 17005 0D61 426D 19538 1308 4C52 051C257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1 7717 20444 1E25 4FDC 24294 3320 5EE6 0CF8258 19332 2358 4B84 0936 9666 1179 25C2 049B 22895 16682 596F 412A259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE 4259 14175 10A3 375F 27652 6388 6C04 18F4260 14698 31198 396A 79DE 7349 15599 1CB5 3CEF 29905 12828 74D1 321C261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB 10738 22617 29F2 5859 21415 3518 53A7 0DBE262 30475 8862 770B 229E 27221 4431 6A55 114F 1210 3494 04BA 0DA6263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7 11992 16999 2ED8 4267 22396 6458 577C 193A264 1912 7443 0778 1D13 956 16565 03BC 40B5 26552 10717 67B8 29DD265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E 26087 14287 65E7 37CF 24829 8463 60FD 210F266 15705 25093 3D59 6205 20348 32574 4F7C 7F3E 8663 27337 21D7 6AC9267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB 22084 17857 5644 45C1 991 19846 03DF 4D86268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F 10217 25907 27E9 6533 21926 9388 55A6 24AC269 16779 32545 418B 7F21 28949 29100 7115 71AC 23306 21201 5B0A 52D1270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8 27786 3556 6C8A 0DE4 13646 31422 354E 7ABE271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77 8430 31111 20EE 7987 148 166 0094 00A6272 8322 10378 2082 288A 4161 5189 1041 1445 24836 28622 6104 6FCE273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9 14265 21328 37B9 5350 24202 6477 5E8A 194D274 26934 5125 6936 1405 13467 17470 349B 443E 9820 10704 265C 29D0275 18806 12528 4976 30F0 9403 6264 24BB 1878 12939 25843 328B 64F3276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF 10108 25451 277C 636B 2364 25406 093C 633E277 9245 20959 241D 51DF 17374 26323 43DE 66D3 14820 21523 39E4 5413278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0 16887 1784 41F7 06F8 2011 8569 07DB 2179279 18684 26453 48FC 6755 9342 32150 247E 7D96 13549 9590 34ED 2576280 8220 29421 201C 72ED 4110 30538 100E 774A 28339 22466 6EB3 57C2281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB 23690 25033 5C8A 61C9 25759 12455 649F 30A7282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B 17174 23345 4316 5B31 11116 27506 2B6C 6B72283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC 15816 12630 3DC8 3156 31448 21847 7AD8 5557284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4 13724 8042 359C 1F6A 27936 28392 6D20 6EE8285 12417 26028 3081 65AC 18832 13014 4990 32D6 3578 1969 0DFA 07B1286 30901 29852 78B5 749C 28042 14926 6D8A 3A4E 12371 30715 3053 77FB287 9366 14978 2496 3A82 4683 7489 124B 1D41 12721 23674 31B1 5C7A288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96 17968 6091 4630 17CB 10264 22629 2818 5865289 21458 25143 53D2 6237 10729 32551 29E9 7F27 25344 12857 6300 3239290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE 3233 7919 0CA1 1EEF 13246 30182 33BE 75E6291 8999 5336 2327 14D8 16451 2668 4043 0A6C 544 21880 0220 5578292 26718 21885 685E 557D 13359 25730 342F 6482 9914 6617 26BA 19D9293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051 1615 26132 064F 6614 4601 27707 11F9 6C3B294 27961 30097 6D39 7591 26444 29940 674C 74F4 16234 16249 3F6A 3F79295 28465 21877 6F31 5575 26184 25734 6648 6486 24475 24754 5F9B 60B2296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25 23699 24622 5C93 602E 26318 31609 66CE 7B79297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC 8669 13030 21DD 32E6 6224 22689 1850 58A1298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC 5916 4982 171C 1376 13381 3226 3445 0C9A299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567 18327 31887 4797 7C8F 30013 4167 753D 1047300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE 20400 1647 4FB0 066F 22195 25624 56B3 6418. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/01/2001 E-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD 8709 29906 2205 74D2 30380 10924 76AC 2AAC302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B 7476 20593 1D34 5071 15337 23096 3BE9 5A38303 52 5371 0034 14FB 26 17473 001A 4441 10716 22683 29DC 589B304 27254 10242 6A76 2802 13627 5121 353B 1401 13592 10955 3518 2ACB305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94 7532 14026 1D6C 36CA 2412 17117 096C 42DD306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A 5471 7357 155F 1CBD 15453 15837 3C5D 3DDD307 377 19550 0179 4C5E 20844 9775 516C 262F 13810 22647 35F2 5877308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2 19007 4433 4A3F 1151 12956 10700 329C 29CC309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1 32357 21468 7E65 53DC 30538 30293 774A 7655310 26629 10898 6805 2A92 26066 5449 65D2 1549 10814 5579 2A3E 15CB311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53 30405 29461 76C5 7315 18939 11057 49FB 2B31312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13 8043 26677 1F6B 6835 19767 30238 4D37 761E313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE 12187 639 2F9B 027F 20547 14000 5043 36B0314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7 17064 22639 42A8 586F 29720 22860 7418 594C315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0 14682 15696 395A 3D50 31831 27172 7C57 6A24316 25560 4381 63D8 111D 12780 18098 31EC 46B2 26287 307 66AF 0133317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32 26348 7449 66EC 1D19 11310 20380 2C2E 4F9C318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97 24479 24823 5F9F 60F7 25724 26427 647C 673B319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB 28336 20817 6EB0 5151 21423 10702 53AF 29CE320 26334 9037 66DE 234D 13167 24474 336F 5F9A 5190 30024 1446 7548321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62 7380 12081 1CD4 2F31 258 14018 0102 36C2322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF 7564 16971 1D8C 424B 13978 4297 369A 10C9323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F 14956 31531 3A6C 7B2B 4670 13938 123E 3672324 4244 16872 1094 41E8 2122 8436 084A 20F4 23496 25288 5BC8 62C8325 8499 9072 2133 2370 16713 4536 4149 11B8 23986 27294 5DB2 6A9E326 9362 12966 2492 32A6 4681 6483 1249 1953 839 31835 0347 7C5B327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6 16911 14443 420F 386B 11296 8228 2C20 2024328 30957 25118 78ED 621E 28070 12559 6DA6 310F 30913 12745 78C1 31C9329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8 18745 10212 4939 27E4 27297 6746 6AA1 1A5A330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49 9675 17176 25CB 4318 10349 1456 286D 05B0331 1153 20983 0481 51F7 21392 26311 5390 66C7 32504 27743 7EF8 6C5F332 29304 12372 7278 3054 14652 6186 393C 182A 18405 27443 47E5 6B33333 6041 13948 1799 367C 23068 6974 5A1C 1B3E 3526 31045 0DC6 7945334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B 10834 31729 2A52 7BF1 19161 12225 4AD9 2FC1335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8 14024 4076 36C8 0FEC 23831 21482 5D17 53EA336 10096 17354 2770 43CA 5048 8677 13B8 21E5 21380 14678 5384 3956337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB 11694 27881 2DAE 6CE9 4282 30656 10BA 77C0338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A 7771 7189 1E5B 1C15 32382 13721 7E7E 3599339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D 32566 16562 7F36 40B2 806 21831 0326 5547340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD 1342 32090 053E 7D5A 6238 30208 185E 7600341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743 9509 17821 2525 459D 10488 9995 28F8 270B342 25501 10346 639D 286A 24606 5173 601E 1435 19507 3248 4C33 0CB0343 4489 13200 1189 3390 22804 6600 5914 19C8 27288 12030 6A98 2EFE344 31011 30402 7923 76C2 27969 15201 6D41 3B61 2390 5688 0956 1638345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F 14724 16507 3984 407B 19094 2082 4A96 0822346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A 24682 1541 606A 0605 13860 23143 3624 5A67347 11846 21398 2E46 5396 5923 10699 1723 29CB 9225 25906 2409 6532348 30331 31104 767B 7980 27373 15552 6AED 3CC0 2505 15902 09C9 3E1E349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0 5294 12136 14AE 2F68 27806 21084 6C9E 525C350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3 16077 31429 3ECD 7AC5 2408 25723 0968 647B. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-10Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA 14786 2789 39C2 0AE5 13347 13427 3423 3473352 13173 25731 3375 6483 18538 31869 486A 7C7D 7885 31084 1ECD 796C353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6 17703 5331 4527 14D3 6669 24023 1A0D 5DD7354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C 112 5542 0070 15A6 8187 23931 1FFB 5D7B355 12083 31098 2F33 797A 17993 15549 4649 3CBD 18145 15836 46E1 3DDC356 22822 16408 5926 4018 11411 8204 2C93 200C 14109 6085 371D 17C5357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA 1467 3181 05BB 0C6D 14231 30324 3797 7674358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F 13846 19315 3616 4B73 27606 27561 6BD6 6BA9359 10205 14732 27DD 398C 16958 7366 423E 1CC6 783 13821 030F 35FD360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8 23649 11372 5C61 2C6C 6301 269 189D 010D361 22098 1476 5652 05C4 11049 738 2B29 02E2 5067 28663 13CB 6FF7362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD 1320 24130 0528 5E42 15383 29619 3C17 73B3363 4408 21118 1138 527E 2204 10559 089C 293F 1392 2043 0570 07FB364 102 22198 0066 56B6 51 11099 0033 2B5B 7641 6962 1DD9 1B32365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E 13816 11015 35F8 2B07 25700 29119 6464 71BF366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B 9823 23041 265F 5A01 25259 22947 62AB 59A3367 26967 25802 6957 64CA 25979 12901 657B 3265 19813 9612 4D65 258C368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0 16004 1248 3E84 04E0 20933 18698 51C5 490A369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38 24240 15644 5EB0 3D1C 638 16782 027E 418E370 655 24248 028F 5EB8 20631 12124 5097 2F5C 16318 29735 3FBE 7427371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7 12637 21959 315D 55C7 6878 2136 1ADE 0858372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72 8105 11577 1FA9 2D39 1328 8086 0530 1F96373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452 18279 6697 4767 1A29 14744 10553 3998 2939374 8535 1806 2157 070E 16763 903 417B 0387 22800 11900 5910 2E7C375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B 29822 28593 747E 6FB1 25919 19996 653F 4E1C376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68 6055 5428 17A7 1534 4795 5641 12BB 1609377 21538 25755 5422 649B 10769 31857 2A11 7C71 18683 28328 48FB 6EA8378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A 17785 7837 4579 1E9D 32658 25617 7F92 6411379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB 6516 17385 1974 43E9 1586 26986 0632 696A380 14717 29096 397D 71A8 19822 14548 4D6E 38D4 27208 5597 6A48 15DD381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE 5833 1519 16C9 05EF 17517 14078 446D 36FE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95 25528 20982 63B8 51F6 599 13247 0257 33BF383 5008 25525 1390 63B5 2504 32742 09C8 7FE6 16253 499 3F7D 01F3384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1 16209 27076 3F51 69C4 8685 30469 21ED 7705385 22175 28855 569F 70B7 31391 30311 7A9F 7667 29972 17544 7514 4488386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC 5871 16366 16EF 3FEE 22128 28510 5670 6F5E387 22546 20373 5812 4F95 11273 27126 2C09 69F6 19871 23196 4D9F 5A9C388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD 30722 23618 7802 5C42 19405 13384 4BCD 3448389 133 26155 0085 662B 20882 32041 5192 7D29 17972 4239 4634 108F390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D 22601 17322 5849 43AA 8599 20725 2197 50F5391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6 4368 6107 1110 17DB 10142 6466 279E 1942392 1397 21479 0575 53E7 21354 26575 536A 67CF 26834 28465 68D2 6F31393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA 9012 15957 2334 3E55 23710 19981 5C9E 4E0D394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37 7766 28967 1E56 7127 27280 16723 6A90 4153395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C 13435 5638 347B 1606 6570 4522 19AA 11AA396 5904 20626 1710 5092 2952 10313 0B88 2849 7400 678 1CE8 02A6397 24341 423 5F15 01A7 32346 20207 7E5A 4EEF 26374 15320 6706 3BD8398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77 18600 19207 48A8 4B07 22218 29116 56CA 71BC399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1 11739 20580 2DDB 5064 29654 5388 73D6 150C400 1862 10818 0746 2A42 931 5409 03A3 1521 13043 22845 32F3 593D. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/01/2001 E-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22 2925 11537 0B6D 2D11 24457 28430 5F89 6F0E402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A 2776 10125 0AD8 278D 17161 8660 4309 21D4403 12589 14629 312D 3925 18758 21166 4946 52AE 21314 2659 5342 0A63404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7 11504 30407 2CF0 76C7 28728 8803 7038 2263405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677 13818 21767 35FA 5507 22162 19690 5692 4CEA406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40 8800 5536 2260 15A0 26259 22169 6693 5699407 17000 29492 4268 7334 8500 14746 2134 399A 22180 8511 56A4 213F408 21913 5719 5599 1657 31516 17687 7B1C 4517 2266 17393 08DA 43F1409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3 15160 16485 3B38 4065 10291 11336 2833 2C48410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C 14120 6078 3728 17BE 26620 13576 67FC 3508411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417 3630 31799 0E2E 7C37 19650 22820 4CC2 5924412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D 8953 30746 22F9 781A 14236 13344 379C 3420413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6 2941 14435 0B7D 3863 11482 20107 2CDA 4E8B414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6 11040 15739 2B20 3D7B 25289 8013 62C9 1F4D415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72 17947 14265 461B 37B9 12011 18835 2EEB 4993416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102 11541 12417 2D15 3081 13892 16793 3644 4199417 17435 9075 441B 2373 29661 24453 73DD 5F85 17336 9818 43B8 265A418 18527 32265 485F 7E09 30207 28984 75FF 7138 10759 4673 2A07 1241419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67 15951 18447 3E4F 480F 26816 13609 68C0 3529420 18783 17434 495F 441A 30079 8717 757F 220D 31065 10054 7959 2746421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92 30413 6089 76CD 17C9 8578 10988 2182 2AEC422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D 3991 31802 0F97 7C3A 24023 14744 5DD7 3998423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC 31205 15846 79E5 3DE6 16199 17930 3F47 460A424 10004 25384 2714 6328 5002 12692 138A 3194 22310 25452 5726 636C425 13459 18908 3493 49DC 19353 9454 4B99 24EE 30402 11334 76C2 2C46426 13383 25816 3447 64D8 19443 12908 4BF3 326C 16613 15451 40E5 3C5B427 28930 4661 7102 1235 14465 18214 3881 4726 13084 11362 331C 2C62428 4860 31115 12FC 798B 2430 29433 097E 72F9 3437 2993 0D6D 0BB1429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B 6554 16697 199A 4139 1703 11012 06A7 2B04430 24161 1311 5E61 051F 32480 19635 7EE0 4CB3 22659 5806 5883 16AE431 20067 16471 4E63 4057 30433 28183 76E1 6E17 26896 20180 6910 4ED4432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B 21733 20721 54E5 50F1 1735 8932 06C7 22E4433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0 6686 8056 1A1E 1F78 16178 23878 3F32 5D46434 28743 21062 7047 5246 27123 10531 69F3 2923 19166 20760 4ADE 5118435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA 32260 14845 7E04 39FD 665 32764 0299 7FFC436 249 10141 00F9 279D 20908 24050 51AC 5DF2 20227 32325 4F03 7E45437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46 9980 9507 26FC 2523 24447 25993 5F7F 6589438 29682 22141 73F2 567D 14841 25858 39F9 6502 16771 3268 4183 0CC4439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C 28014 5926 6D6E 1726 27209 25180 6A49 625C440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724 13574 13202 3506 3392 6050 12149 17A2 2F75441 26706 30663 6852 77C7 13353 30175 3429 75DF 29088 10193 71A0 27D1442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C 2574 16262 0A0E 3F86 7601 9128 1DB1 23A8443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4 2108 14322 083C 37F2 4905 7843 1329 1EA3444 5762 10228 1682 27F4 2881 5114 0B41 13FA 5915 25474 171B 6382445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0 20906 11768 51AA 2DF8 6169 11356 1819 2C5C446 21882 18045 557A 467D 10941 27906 2ABD 6D02 21303 11226 5337 2BDA447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361 22153 32652 5689 7F8C 28096 16268 6DC0 3F8C448 206 27066 00CE 69BA 103 13533 0067 34DD 8905 14491 22C9 389B449 28798 13740 707E 35AC 14399 6870 383F 1AD6 26997 8366 6975 20AE450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7 16201 21703 3F49 54C7 15047 26009 3AC7 6599. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-12Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)451 13463 3684 3497 0E64 19355 1842 4B9B 0732 17460 5164 4434 142C452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3 20428 24685 4FCC 606D 17629 17126 44DD 42E6453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2 31950 7657 7CCE 1DE9 10461 21566 28DD 543E454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5 19686 29014 4CE6 7156 21618 21845 5472 5555455 23429 9816 5B85 2658 31762 4908 7C12 132C 11498 28149 2CEA 6DF5456 12990 4444 32BE 115C 6495 2222 195F 08AE 193 9400 00C1 24B8457 12421 5664 3085 1620 18834 2832 4992 0B10 16140 19459 3F0C 4C03458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE 27061 3679 69B5 0E5F 13419 7190 346B 1C16459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80 22020 13632 5604 3540 10864 3101 2A70 0C1D460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0 936 14064 03A8 36F0 28935 491 7107 01EB461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8 19553 15084 4C61 3AEC 18765 25497 494D 6399462 30109 29971 759D 7513 27422 29877 6B1E 74B5 27644 29807 6BFC 746F463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51 32560 18580 7F30 4894 21564 26508 543C 678C464 4862 16910 12FE 420E 2431 8455 097F 2107 5142 4442 1416 115A465 14091 20739 370B 5103 19029 26301 4A55 66BD 1211 4871 04BB 1307466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF 3351 24027 0D17 5DDB 1203 31141 04B3 79A5467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213 21549 22325 542D 5735 5199 9864 144F 2688468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F 26145 27539 6621 6B93 16945 12589 4231 312D469 21379 10072 5383 2758 30737 5036 7811 13AC 4883 5417 1313 1529470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57 10138 21399 279A 5397 25040 8549 61D0 2165471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64 24748 13874 60AC 3632 7119 14288 1BCF 37D0472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0 30625 360 77A1 0168 17826 8503 45A2 2137473 10147 29799 27A3 7467 16897 29711 4201 740F 4931 20357 1343 4F85474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8 28955 13820 711B 35FC 25705 15381 6469 3C15475 17359 263 43CF 0107 28727 20159 7037 4EBF 10726 18065 29E6 4691476 13248 24734 33C0 609E 6624 12367 19E0 304F 17363 24678 43D3 6066477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7 11370 28239 2C6A 6E4F 2746 23858 0ABA 5D32478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A 18499 10189 4843 27CD 10952 7610 2AC8 1DBA479 10345 25116 2869 621C 17892 12558 45E4 310E 19313 18097 4B71 46B1480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5 15171 26710 3B43 6856 29756 20918 743C 51B6481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940 13933 7328 366D 1CA0 14297 7238 37D9 1C46482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F 17275 31547 437B 7B3B 21290 30549 532A 7755483 8808 28728 2268 7038 4404 14364 1134 381C 1909 16320 0775 3FC0484 12744 25092 31C8 6204 6372 12546 18E4 3102 8994 20853 2322 5175485 11618 22601 2D62 5849 5809 25112 16B1 6218 13295 26736 33EF 6870486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7 13581 19183 350D 4AEF 21590 10327 5456 2857487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD 29477 32594 7325 7F52 26468 24404 6764 5F54488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE 27592 7679 6BC8 1DFF 13636 7931 3544 1EFB489 31892 17739 7C94 454B 15946 27801 3E4A 6C99 5207 5310 1457 14BE490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163 11982 22157 2ECE 568D 29493 554 7335 022A491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA 11781 16365 2E05 3FED 18992 27311 4A30 6AAF492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2 1482 9561 05CA 2559 12567 6865 3117 1AD1493 18208 16870 4720 41E6 9104 8435 2390 20F3 12075 7762 2F2B 1E52494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23 7514 23341 1D5A 5B2D 26658 15761 6822 3D91495 21901 18400 558D 47E0 31510 9200 7B16 23F0 21077 12697 5255 3199496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47 12283 27039 2FFB 699F 15595 24850 3CEB 6112497 18994 1937 4A32 0791 9497 19956 2519 4DF4 4921 15259 1339 3B9B498 13608 17963 3528 462B 6804 27945 1A94 6D29 14051 24243 36E3 5EB3499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E 13746 3719 35B2 0E87 5956 30508 1744 772C500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A 5853 6469 16DD 1945 21202 13982 52D2 369E. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/01/2001 E-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48 19006 9636 4A3E 25A4 11239 25039 2BE7 61CF502 23380 29989 5B54 7525 11690 29870 2DAA 74AE 30038 24086 7556 5E16503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E 5669 4263 1625 10A7 30222 21581 760E 544D504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB 21513 27985 5409 6D51 13476 21346 34A4 5362505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF 11695 18539 2DAF 486B 2497 28187 09C1 6E1B506 14473 28919 3889 70F7 19860 30279 4D94 7647 31842 23231 7C62 5ABF507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C 3265 3646 0CC1 0E3E 24342 18743 5F16 4937508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104 10226 10370 27F2 2882 25857 11594 6501 2D4A509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A 6113 13997 17E1 36AD 27662 7198 6C0E 1C1E510 1058 2224 0422 08B0 529 1112 0211 0458 24594 105 6012 0069511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB 6013 17257 177D 4369 16790 4534 4196 11B6 E
PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001E-14NotesE
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix F: Test Equipment Preparation Appendix ContentTest Equipment Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Test Equipment Connections F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Connection F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating HP437 Power Meter F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Gigatronics 8542 power meter F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesF
Test Equipment Preparation08/01/2001 F-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPurposeThis appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCSinterface, the HP8935, the Advantest R3465, and the HP437 andGigatronics 8542 power meters. The Cybertest test set doesn’t requireany setup.HP8921A Test EquipmentConnectionsThe following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A testequipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipmentis controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expectseach piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer toTable F-4). If there is a communications problem between the LMF andany piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresseshave been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected tothe test equipment.Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium ReferenceFrom Test Set: To Interface:8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS Connector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–female – SMC–female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–female – SMC–femaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT SYNTH REF IN BNC–male – BNC–maleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–male – BNC–maleF
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-2REAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETFigure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium ReferenceREF INHP83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP83236A PCSINTERFACEHP–IBTO GPIBINTERFACEBOXTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORFW00368F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/01/2001 F-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium ReferenceFrom Test Set: To Interface:8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS Connector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–female – SMC–female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–female – SMC–femaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–male – BNC–maleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable10 MHZ INPUT 10 MHZ OUT BNC–male – BNC–maleF
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-4REF INREAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACEBOX10 MHZ WITHRUBIDIUM STANDARDFigure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium ReferenceHP83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP83236A PCSINTERFACEHP–IBFW00369F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/01/2001 F-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYHP8921A System ConnectivityTestFollow the steps outlined in Table F-3 to verify that the connectionsbetween the PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables areintact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of eachinstrument.Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially systemcontrollers, from the system before running theconnectivity software.IMPORTANT*Table F-3: System ConnectivityStep Action* IMPORTANT–Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. Inthe Choices selection box, select Card.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. Inthe Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through theconnectivity setup.7Do the following when the test is complete,Sposition cursor on STOP TEST and select itSOR press the [K5] pushbutton.8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.9Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-6Setting HP8921A andHP83236A/B GPIB AddressTable F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB AddressStep Action1If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.2Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.SHP8921A HP–IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configureon the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).SHP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:–A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1Pretest Setup for HP8921ABefore the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921AStep Action1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.2Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.3Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.4Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.Pretest Setup for HP8935Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935Step Action1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.2Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.3Press the Push to Select knob.4Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.5 Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/01/2001 F-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAdvantest R3465 ConnectionThe following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest testequipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipmentis controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expectseach piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer toTable F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF andany piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresseshave been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected tothe test equipment.Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium ReferenceADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELGPIBCONNECTORSERIAL I/OLOCAL INSERIAL I/OSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3561LREAR PANELR3465REAR PANELTO T–CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)XYZIF OUT421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00370F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-8Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.SERIAL I/OGPIBCONNECTOR ADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELFigure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium ReferenceFROM 10 MHZRUBIDIUM REFERENCELOCAL INSERIAL I/OIF OUTSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3465/3463REAR PANELR3561LREAR PANELTO T–CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)XYZ421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00371F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/01/2001 F-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYR3465 GPIB Address & ClocksetupTable F-7 describes the steps to set the GPIB address and clock for theAdvantest R3465 equipment.Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock SetupStep Action1Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:SPush the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).SPush the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)–Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.–If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob toenter)2Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set ifrequired)Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)SPush the Date/Time CRT menu keySIf required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernierknob to enter)S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display). Pretest Setup for AdvantestR3465Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346Step Action1Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.2Press the RESET button.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-10Calibrating HP437 Power MeterPrecise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps outlined in Table F-9 to enter information unique to thepower sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-5 asrequired.This procedure must be done in conjunction with theautomated calibration to enter power sensor specificcalibration values.IMPORTANT*CONNECT POWERSENSOR WITH POWERMETER TURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSORTO POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.POWER REFERENCE ISENABLED USING THE SHIFT 'KEYSSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308Figure F-5: Power Meter DetailTable F-9: Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.1–Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.–Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.2Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.NOTEThe calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed towarm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.3Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:–To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET].–Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].–Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].–To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/01/2001 F-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable F-9: Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action4Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:–Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.–Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button toselect the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].NOTEBe sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOTdisplayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off.5 Press [ZERO]. Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.6Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.7To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:–Press [SHIFT] then ['].–Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.8Perform the following to set the REF CF %:–Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.–Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)NOTEIf the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.9Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:–Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.–On the sensor's decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enterthe sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and0.10 is normal.)10 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:–Press [SHIFT] then ['].–Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output. F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-12Calibrating Gigatronics 8542power meterPrecise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps in Table F-10 to enter information unique to the powersensor.Table F-10: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power MeterStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.NOTEAllow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes beforeperforming the calibration procedure.1SMake sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.SConnect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.SSet the POWER pushbutton to ON.2Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:SPress MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.SUse the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.SUse the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C or 8542C (as appropriate).SPress ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.SPress ENTER.3SConnect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.SPress ZERO.SWait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during thisprocess.SDisconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/01/2001 F-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure F-6: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter DetailCONNECT POWER SENSORWITH POWER METERTURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSOR TOCALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNITFRONT View REAR ViewGPIB CONNECTIONAC POWERFW00564F
Manual Cable CalibrationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-14Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing HP PCS Interface (HP83236)Table F-11 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with theHP83236 PCS Interface.This calibration method must be executed with great care.Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit ofthe power meter sensor (–30 dBm).NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cablecalibration.STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step ActionNOTEVerify that GPIB controller is turned off.1Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.2Press the Preset pushbutton.3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectCARD.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectMANUAL.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.7If using HP83236A:Set channel number=<chan#>:–Position cursor at ChannelNumber and select it.–Enter the chan# using the numerickeypad; press [Enter] and thescreen will go blank.–When the screen reappears, thechan# will be displayed on thechannel number line.If using HP83236B:Set channel frequency:–Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.–Select User Defined Frequency.–Go Back to Previous Menu.–Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency andenter actual RX frequency.–Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency andenter actual TX frequency.. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/01/2001 F-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action8Set RF Generator level:–Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.–Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.–When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:–Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it–Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.–Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].10 Select Back to Previous Menu.11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:–Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.–Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.–Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 – 1910MHz).–Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.NOTEThe Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitudeby adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dBshould be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meterbefore connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting eachcomponent, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record thecalibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = –1.4 dB(B) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(B) Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-16Table F-11: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total testsetup loss by adding up all the individual losses:SExample: Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.21 Select Continue (K2).22 Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fieldsnot indicated remain at default):SVerify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:–under To Screen, select More–select IO CONFIG–Set HP–IB Adrs to 18–set Mode to Talk&LstnSVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)–Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches tothe CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.–Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq25 Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/01/2001 F-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(A)POWERSENSOR(C)30 dBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER150 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSOR(B)POWERSENSOR(B)MEMORYCARDSLOT20 dB / 20 WATTATTENUATORFW00292Figure F-7: Cable Calibration Using HP8921 with PCS Interface50 ΩTERMINATIONF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-18Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing Advantest R3465Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.NOTEAdvantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performedat both the TX and RX frequencies.Table F-12: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action* IMPORTANT–This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key4Select the Setup CRT menu key5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parametersNOTEFields not listed remain at defaultGenerator Mode: SIGNALLink: FORWARDLevel Unit: dBmCalCorrection: ONLevel Offset: OFF6Select the return CRT menu key7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle itOFF.11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561LCDMA Test Source Unit.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.15 Record the power meter reading ________________________. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/01/2001 F-191X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable F-12: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dBshould be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter beforeconnecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect eachcomponent one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-8, “SetupsA, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB(C) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dBThis calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.23 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001F-20POWERSENSOR20 DB / 2 WATTATTENUATOR(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(D)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(C)100 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSORRF OUTPOWERSENSOR& (B)FW00320Figure F-8: Cable Calibration Using Advantest R346550 ΩTERMINATIONF
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix G: Download ROM Code Appendix ContentDownloading ROM Code with the LMF G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Procedure – Downloading Device ROM Code G-1. . . . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesF
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF08/01/2001 G-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYException Procedure –Downloading Device ROMCodeThis procedure is not part of a normal optimization.Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternativeexists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.An MGLI or GLI must be INS (green) before ROM codecan be downloaded to non–GLI devices.NOTERelease 2.9.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to adevice loaded with Release 2.8.x ROM code, and Release2.8.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a deviceloaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code.All devices in a BTS must have the same Release–levelROM and RAM code before the optimization and ATPprocedures can be performed.If a newly–installed Release 8–equipped BTS is to beupgraded to Release 2.9.x, the optimization andAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should be accomplishedwith the Release 2.8.x code and software. Following theoptimization, the site code and software should beupgraded to Release 2.9.x by the CBSC. It is not necessaryto perform the optimization and ATPs again after theupgrade.If a replacement device with Release 2.8.x ROM codemust be used in a Release 2.9.x–equipped BTS, the deviceROM code can be changed using the CDMA LMF beforethe performing the BTS optimization and ATPs. A deviceloaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code can not be convertedback to Release 2.8.x ROM code in the field withoutMotorola assistance.CAUTIONIf it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the CDMALMF, the procedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAMcode download using the CDMA LMF.PrerequisitesPrior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAMcode files exist on the CDMA LMF for each of the devices to be loaded.F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001G-2The Release level of the ROM code to be downloadedmust be the same as the Release level of the ROM coderesident in the other devices in the BTS. Release 2.9.xROM code must not be downloaded to a frame havingRelease 2.8.x code, and Release 2.8.x code must not bedownloaded to a frame having Release 2.9.x code.This procedure should only be used to upgradereplacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used toupgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgradedfrom Release 2.8.x to Release 2.9.x, optimization and ATPmust first be performed with the BTS in a Release 2.8.xconfiguration. Following this, the upgrade from Release2.8.x to Release 2.9.x should be done by the CBSC.CAUTIONTable G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to DevicesStep Action1Click on the device to be loaded.2From the Device pull down menu, select Status.A status report window will appear3Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.NOTE“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This number is used as the last four digitsin the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code filecan be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.4 Click OK to close the status window.5Click on the device to be loaded.* IMPORTANTThe CDMA LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files mustbe selected manually.6From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code Manual.A file selection window will appear.7 Double–click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file.8 Double–click the Code folder.A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.. . . continued on next pageF
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued08/01/2001 G-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to DevicesStep Action! CAUTIONA ROM code file with the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) must be chosen. Using a filewith the wrong HW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.9Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Typenumber noted in step 3 (e.g., file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a HW BinType of 0604).The file should be highlighted.10 Click on the Load button.A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.11 Click OK to close the status window.12 From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.13 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download and click Save.A pop–up message will appear showing the CDF file has been updated.14 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.15 Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.NOTERAM code is automatically selected for download.16 From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code to download RAM code.A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.17 Click OK to close the status window.18 Observe the downloaded device to ensure it is OOS–RAM (yellow) for non–GLI devices or INS(green) for GLIs.19 Click on the device which was loaded with code.20 From the Device pull down menu, select Status.Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.21 Click OK to close the status window.NOTEData is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the datadownload portion of the Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices procedure, Table 3-15,to download data to other device types after their ROM code has been upgraded and RAM codedownloaded. F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001G-4NotesF
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix H: In–Service Calibration Appendix ContentIntroduction H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm up H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1X Test Equipment Requirements H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration H-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Delta Calibration Introduction H-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration H-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration H-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8935 series E6380A Power Delta Calibration H-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Power Delta Calibration H-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration H-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Service Calibration H-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Service Calibration for 1X Upgrade H-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001NotesH
Introduction08/01/2001 H-11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPurposeThis procedure is a guide to performing calibration of new BTSexpansion carriers while the system remains in service. This procedurealso supports BTS recalibration following replacement of RF chaincomponents while the remainder of the site stays in service.Motorola recommends performing this procedure during a maintenancewindow.This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 2–to–1 combiners.The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at onetime. That is, LPAs 1A, 1B, 1C, and 1D can be calibrated while LPAs3A, 3B, 3C, and 3D remain in service and vice versa.Equipment Warm upCalibration of the communications test set (or equivalenttest equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibrate the testequipment after it has been allowed to warm-up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.IMPORTANT*If any component of the test equipment set (for example, atest cable, RF adapter, signal generator) has been replaced,the test equipment set must be recalibrated. Failure to do socould introduce measurement errors which ultimately resultin degradation of system performance.CAUTION1X Test EquipmentRequirementsCalibration of 1X carrier functions requires using either of the followingtest equipment combinations:SAn Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with an Advantest R3562signal generatorSAn Agilent E4406A Transmitter Test Set with an Agilent E4432Asignal generatorSAn Agilent 8935 series E6380A equipped with option 200 (ifpurchased new) or option R2K (if retrofitted) and an Agilent E4432Bsignal generatorThese test equipment combinations are capable of calibrating the BTSfor both IS–95 A and B mode operation as well as IS–2000 CDMA 1Xoperation.H
Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-2IS–95A/B communication test sets such as theHP8921A/600 and Advantest R3561L can not calibrate 1Xcarrier functions.IMPORTANT*Calibration and test set–up for the HP 8921A/600 and AdvantestR3561L test sets is included only for situations where it is necessary touse them for calibration of IS–95A/B mode operation.H
Power Delta Calibration08/01/2001 H-31X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPower Delta CalibrationIntroductionThe ISC procedure has several differences from a normal calibrationprocedure. One of these is the use of a spectrumanalyzer/communications test set instead of a power meter to measurepower. Power meters are broadband measurement devices and cannot beused to measure power during ISC because other carriers are operating.A spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a givenfrequency. Measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less accuratethan using a power meter, therefore, compensation is required for theaccuracy difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrumanalyzer.Agilent E4406A Power DeltaCalibrationThe Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator testequipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X aswell as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration isperformed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate thereference signal used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offsetvalue has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to perform the Agilent E4406APower Delta Calibration procedure.Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter powersensor (see Figure H-1).3Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:–Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured–Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the numeric keypad–Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured; forexample MHz–Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero)–Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-4Table H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action4On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.–Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.5Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.6On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.–Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.7Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the RFINPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure H-2).8* IMPORTANTDo not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the followingsteps.Set the E4406A as follows:–Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured–Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne–Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum–Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency–Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric keypad–Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured; for example, MHz–Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten–Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB–Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile–Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB–Using the soft keys, select Base–Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB–Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power9On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.–Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.10 Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as result B____________________.11 On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.–Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-51X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable H-1: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action12 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Agilent measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see step 4 inTable H-6). Figure H-1: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to HP437PowerSensorAgilent E4432B and E4406AShort RF CableHP437BSENSORRF OUTPUTFigure H-2: Delta Calibration Setup – Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406AShort RF CableRF INPUTAgilent E4432B and E4406ARF OUTPUT H
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-6Advantest R3267 Power DeltaCalibrationThe Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer and R3562 signal generator testequipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1X aswell as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration isperformed on the R3267. After the offset value has been calculated, addit to the TX cable loss value.Follow the procedure in Table H-2 to perform the Advantest R3267Power Delta Calibration procedure.Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action1* IMPORTANTWarm-up test equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to this procedure. After it is warmed upand stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the “Test Set Calibration” section ofChapter 3.Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located on the right side of the control panel.2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.3On the CRT, select RX Control by pressing ACTIVE key 1.4On the CRT, select Frequency Setup by pressing ACTIVE key 3.5On the CRT, highlight Frequency by adjusting the DISPLAY CONTROL knob.6 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.7Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad ENTRY section keys.8Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.9Set the level to 0 dBm using the keypad ENTRY section keys.10 On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Modulation, if not press the ACTIVE key 5 to toggle itOFF.11 On the CRT, verify OFF is highlighted in Output, if not press the ACTIVE key 6 to toggle it OFF.12 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.13 Connect the RF cable from the R3562 signal generator RF OUT port to the power sensor, refer toFigure H-3.14 On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE key 6.15 Record the Power Meter reading as result A________________________16 On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to OFF by pressing ACTIVE key 6.. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-71X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action17 Connect the RF cable from R3562 signal generator RF OUT port to the R3267 spectrum analyzerINPUT Port, refer to Figure H-4.18 On the R3562 CRT, set the Output to ON by pressing ACTIVE key 6.19 On the R3267, press the POWER key in the MEASUREMENT section of the control panel.20 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.21 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad ENTRY section keys.22 On the CRT, select dB/div by pressing ACTIVE key 1.23 On the CRT, select 10 dB/div by pressing ACTIVE key 1.24 Press the FREQ key in ENTRY section of the control panel.25 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad ENTRY section keys.26 On the CRT, select more 1/2 by pressing ACTIVE key 7.27 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.66G.28 Press the POWER key in the MEASUREMENT section of the control panel.29 Press the SPAN key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.30 On the CRT, select Zero Span by pressing ACTIVE key 2.31 Press the COUPLE key in the ENTRY section of the control panel.32 On the CRT, select RBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE key 3.33 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad ENTRY section keys.34 On the CRT, select VBW and highlight MNL by pressing ACTIVE key 2.35 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad ENTRY section keys.36 Press the MKR key in the DISPLAY CONTROL section of the control panel.37 On the CRT, select Normal Marker by pressing ACTIVE key 1.38 Record the Marker Level reading as result B________________________39 Press Single in ENTRY section of control panel.. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-8Table H-2: Advantest R3267 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.7 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see step 4 inTable H-6). Figure H-3: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to HP437PowerSensorAdvantest R3562 and R3267Short RF CableHP437BSENSORRF OUTFigure H-4: Delta Calibration Setup – Advantest R3562 to R3267Advantest R3562 and R3267Short RF CableRF OUTRF INH
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-91X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAgilent 8935 series E6380APower Delta CalibrationThe Agilent E6380A (formerly HP8935) communications test setmodified with either option 200 or R2K and E4432B signal generatortest equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS–2000 CDMA 1Xas well as IS–95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration isperformed on the E6380A. After the offset value has been calculated,add it to the TX cable loss value.Follow the procedure in Table H-3 to perform the Agilent E6380APower Delta Calibration procedure.Table H-3: Agilent E6380A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF cable between the E6380A Duplex Out port and the HP437 power sensor (seeFigure H-5).3Set the E6380A signal source as follows:–Measure mode to CDMA Gen–Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency–CW RF Path to IQ–Output Port to Dupl–Data Source to Random–Amplitude to 0 dBm4Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437 Power Meter.5Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.6Turn off the E6380A signal source output, and disconnect the HP437.NOTELeave the settings on the source E6380A for convenience in the following steps.7Connect the short RF cable between the E6380A Duplex Out port and the RF–IN/OUT port (seeFigure H-6).8Ensure that the source E6380A settings are the same as in Step 3.. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-10Table H-3: Agilent E6380A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action9Set the E6380A as follows:–Measure mode to CDMA Anl–Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency–Input Attenuation to 0 dB–Input port to RF–IN–Gain to Auto–Anl Dir to Fwd10 Turn on the E6380A signal output.11 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.12 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring E6380A as resultB ________________________.13 Turn off the E6380A signal output and disconnect the equipment.14 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 inTable H-6). Figure H-5: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to HP437PowerSensorAgilent E6380ADUPLEX OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORFW00805H
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-111X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure H-6: Delta Calibration Setup – E6380A to E6380AAgilent E6380AShort RF CableDUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUTFW00806H
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-12HP8921A Power DeltaCalibrationUse the HP8921A communications test set to measure power during ISConly for IS–95A and B operation of 800 MHz systems. After the offsetvalue has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.Follow the procedure in Table H-4 to perform the HP8921A Power DeltaCalibration procedure.This procedure requires two HP8921A communication testsets.NOTETable H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437 power sensor (seeFigure H-7).3Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:–Measure mode to CDMA Generator–Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency–CW RF Path to IQ–Output Port to Dupl–Data Source to Random–Amplitude to 0 dBm4Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437 Power Meter.5Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.6Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437.NOTELeave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.7Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuringHP8921A RF–IN port (see Figure H-8).8Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 3.. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-131X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable H-4: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action9Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:–Measure mode to CDMA Anl–Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency–Input Attenuation to 0 dB–Input port to RF–IN–Gain to Auto–Analyzer Direction to Fwd10 Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.11 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as resultB ________________________.12 Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.13 Compute the delta between HP437 and HP8921A using the following formula:Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 inTable H-6). Figure H-7: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437Short RF CableHP 8921ADUPLEXOUTHP437BPowerSensorSENSORFW00801H
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-14Figure H-8: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A toHP8921A Measurement HP8921A Source HP8921AShort RF CableDUPLEXOUTRFIN/OUTFW00802H
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-151X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAdvantest R3465 Power DeltaCalibrationUse the Advantest R3465 spectrum analyzer to measure power duringISC only for IS–95A and B operation. After the offset value has beencalculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.Follow the procedure in Table H-5 to perform the Advantest 3465 PowerDelta Calibration procedure.Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the“Test Set Calibration” section of Chapter 3.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.2Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.3Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.4Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.5Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.6Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.8Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.9Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.11 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA signal generator RF OUT port to the power sensor,refer to Figure H-9.12 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.13 Record the Power Meter reading as result A________________________.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.15 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L signal generator RF OUT port to the R3465 INPUT Port,refer to Figure H-10.16 Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.17 Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.18 Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.. . . continued on next pageH
Power Delta Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-16Table H-5: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action20 Press the dB/div CRT menu key.21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.22 Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.24 Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.25 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.26 Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.27 Press the TRACE CRT menu key.28 Press the AVG A CRT menu key.29 Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.30 Press the return CRT menu key.31 Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.32 Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.33 Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.34 Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.36 Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.38 Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.39 Record the Marker Level reading as result B________________________.40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A – BExample: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 inTable H-6). H
Power Delta Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-171X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure H-9: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437Advantest PowerSensorRF OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORR3561LFW00803Figure H-10: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465R3561LRF OUTINPUTShort RF CableR3465FW00804H
In–Service CalibrationPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-18In–Service Calibration for 1XUpgradeThis feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time.The system has no safe–guards to prevent actions whichwill put the BTS out of service. If possible, perform thisprocedure during a maintenance window.Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwisethe entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansionhardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior toperforming this procedure.IMPORTANT*PrerequisitesSExpansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and theCDF file has been generated.SThe expansion devices have been inserted into the C–CCP cage andare in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC MM.SThe site specific CDF (with the expansion hardware) and CAL fileshave been loaded onto the LMF.SThe LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.Do not download code or data to any cards other than thoseyou are working on. Downloading code or data to othercards will take the site OUT OF SERVICE.The code file version numbers must match the versionnumbers required for the upgrade cards (refer to NO TAG).If the numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OFSERVICE.It is mandatory that the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdffiles on the LMF computer for this BTS are copies of thecorresponding files created in the CBSC database (seeNO TAG).The CAL file loaded on the LMF computer for this BTSmust have come from the CBSC.IMPORTANT*STest equipment has been configured per Figure H-11, Figure H-12,Figure H-13, or Figure H-14.H
In–Service Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-191X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSAn RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss isalready known, must be in line to perform the in–service calibration.STest equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.SA short RF cable and two BNC–N adapters are available to performCable Calibration.SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table H-1,Table H-2, Table H-3, Table H-4, or Table H-5).H
In–Service Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-20TXTESTCABLEAgilent E6380A (HP 8935)DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER WITHUNUSED PORTTERMINATEDEVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00758SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDANTENNARXCABLEANTENNAFigure H-11: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler – Agilent TestEquipment20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)RFINPUTRFOUTPUTAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER H
In–Service Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-211X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTXTESTCABLETEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER WITHUNUSED PORTTERMINATEDEVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00758ANTENNARXCABLEANTENNAFigure H-12: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler – Advantest R3267/R3562Test Equipment20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)RF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERH
In–Service Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-22TXTESTCABLEDUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.ANTENNARFDSDUPLEXERDIRECTIONALCOUPLEREVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00759SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRXCABLEFWDCOUPLEDPORTFigure H-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS – Agilent Test Equipment20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)RFINPUTRFOUTPUTAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER Agilent E6380A (HP 8935)H
In–Service Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-231X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTXTESTCABLETEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.ANTENNARFDSDUPLEXERDIRECTIONALCOUPLEREVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00759RXCABLEFWDCOUPLEDPORTFigure H-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS – Advantest R3267/R3562 Test Equipment20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)RF INRF OUTAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERH
In–Service Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-24Follow the procedure in Table H-6 to perform the In–ServiceCalibration.Table H-6: In–Service CalibrationStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Set up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:–Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.–Click Tools > Options from the menu bar at the login screen.–Check only the applicable spectrum analyzer check box on the Test Equipment tab.Ensure that the GPIB address is 18.–Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.–Click the Apply button.–Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Options window.–Check the In–Service Calibration check box.–Click the Apply button.–Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.2Login to the target BTS:–Select the target BTS icon.–Click the Login button at the login screen.3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:–Click Util > Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.–Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL in the cable calibration pop–upwindow.–Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.–Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.NOTE–The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.–To view the cable loss file, click Util > Examine > Cable Loss.. . . continued on next pageH
In–Service Calibration – continued08/01/2001 H-251X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable H-6: In–Service CalibrationStep Action4Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the TX Cable Loss.–Click Util > Edit > Cable Loss > TX.–Add the value computed in Table H-4, Table H-5, or Table H-3 to the TX Cable Loss.NOTEBe sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematicsand do not represent actual readings:–Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm–Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm–Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm–Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX tests:–Click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss > TX from the menu bar at the main window.–Enter the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken atthe time of BTS installation.–Click the Save button.–Click the Dismiss button to close the window.–To view the coupler loss file, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss.6Input the Coupler Loss for the RX tests:–Click Util > Edit > Coupler Loss > RX from the menu bar at the main window.–Enter the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken atthe time of BTS installation.–Click the Save button.–Click the Dismiss button to close the window.–To view the couper loss file, click Util > Examine > Coupler Loss.7If it was not previously done, have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.! CAUTIONBe sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICEand can result in dropped calls.The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If thenumbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.NOTEBe sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 8, 9, and 10.. . . continued on next pageH
In–Service Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001H-26Table H-6: In–Service CalibrationStep Action8Download code and data to the target devices:–Click Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.–Check the appropriate code version in the pop up window and click the Save button to close.–Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.–Click Device > Download Code/Data to start downloading code and data.! CAUTIONPerform the All Cal/Audit procedure on OOS devices only.9Run the All Cal/Audit procedure:–Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.–Click Tests > All Cal/Audit from the menu bar at the main window.–Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.–Leave the Verify BLO check box checked and click the OK button to start calibration.–Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to thedirectional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.10 Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):–Click the Save Result button on the result screen.The window closes automatically.11 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:–Click Select > Logout to close the BTS connection.–Close the LMF window.12 Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC (refer to Table 5-2).13 Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC. H
08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-1IndexNumbers10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional test equipment,1-1110BaseT/10Base2 converterLMF to BTS connection, 3-21remove from BTS, 5-42–way splitter, optional test equipment, 1-1050–pair punchblock, 3-18AAbbreviatedRX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4TX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4Acceptance Test Procedure. See ATPACTIVE LEDGLI, 6-31MCC, 6-33Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,3-18ALARM LED, GLI, 6-31Alarm Monitor window, 3-86Alarm Reporting Display, 3-86All RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-6All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,RFDS, 6-26All TX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5Applying AC Power, 2-12ATPall inclusive TX acceptance test outline, 4-4automated introduction, 4-1code domain noise floor acceptance test procedure,4-16code domain power acceptance test procedure, 4-16failure report generation, 4-20FER test, frame error rate testing, 4-19pilot time offset, 4-13prerequisites, 4-2spectral purity TX mask, 4-10test matrix/detailed optimization, B-2waveform quality (Rho), 4-12waveform quality (RHO) acceptance test procedure,4-12Attenuator, required test equipment, 1-9BBasic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-15Battery Discharge Test, 2-16Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-10BBXcarrier spectral purity, 4-9gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-1primary and redundant, TX tests to be performed,4-7BBX2 Connector, 6-20BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-33BDC, pilot gain setting, 4-18Bringing modules into service, prepare to leave thesite, 5-3Broad Band Receiver. See BBXBTSdownload, 3-32Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-29LMF connection, 3-15, 3-21log out of session, 5-4RX sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8system software download, 3-3when to optimize, B-1
Index – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Index-2BTS Frame Erasure Rate. See FERBTS Log In Procedure, GUI, 3-24BTS loginCLI environment, 3-25General, 3-23GUI environment, 3-24BTS LogoutCLI environment, 3-27GUI environment, 3-26Create CAL File, 3-76bts–nnn.cal File, 3-10CCables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,F-2, F-4Calibrate BLO, 3-65Calibrating Cables, 3-59Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS InterfaceHP83236B, F-14Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-59Calibrationdata file calibration, BLO, 3-67power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-12Calibration Audit failure, 6-11calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-67Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,6-6Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-5Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-7Cannot ENABLE device, 6-8Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-16Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Powermeasurement, 6-16Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offsetmeasurement, 6-15Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-15cbsc folder, 3-11CDFsite configuration, 3-2site equipage verification, 3-3site type and equipage data information, 2-1CDMAallocation diagram for the North American, cellulartelephone frequency spectrum, D-4optimization/ATP test matrix, B-1subscriber mobile radiotelephone, optional testequipment, 1-11cdma Folder, 3-9CDMA LMF and Logical BTS, 3-22Cell Siteequipage verification, 2-1types configuration, 3-2Cell Site Data File. See CDFChannel Service Unit, 3-15CIO Connectors, 6-21Clock Sync Module. See CSMCode domain power/noise flooracceptance test, 4-15analyzer display, 4-17code Folder, 3-11Communication test set, rear panel, F-2, F-4Communications test set. See Test equipmentConnect BTS E1/T1 spans, 5-5Connect BTS T1/E1 spans, 5-5Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-48Connector FunctionalityBackplane, Troubleshooting, 6-20Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-20Control, TX output verification, 4-3Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-5Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,5-1Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-1CSM, and LFR primary functions, 3-38CSM frequency verification, 3-40CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-29Ddata Folder, 3-12DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame), 2-7
Index – continued08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-3DC Power Problems, C–CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-24DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-28Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2Devices, download. See DownloadDigital Control Problems, 6-21C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-21Digital multimeter, required test equipment, 1-9Directional coupler, required test equipment, 1-9Documents, required, 1-12DownloadSee also DevicesBTS, 3-32BTS system software, 3-3Download BLO Procedure, 3-73Download from the CBSC, prepare to leave the site,5-3download ROM and RAM code, G-2Download/Enable MCCs, 3-37Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-34Duplexer, optional test equipment, 1-10EE1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-14Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-36End LMF session, 5-4Equipment Overview, 1-15Equipment warm-up, 3-50establish MMI communication, 3-27Ethernet LANinterconnect diagram, 3-29transceiver, 1-7Ethernet LAN termination, 2-3Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-26FFailure report generation, 4-20FER, acceptance test, 4-19Filescalibration data file, BLO, 3-67intermediate file, 4-20Filtronics, low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) orequivalent, optional test equipment, 1-10Fluke, model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit, testequipment, 1-9Folder Structure Overview, 3-9Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-30Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10GGain set point, C-1Generating an ATP Report, 4-20General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-13GLI Connector, 6-20GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-20GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-31GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-32GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-32GPIB, F-1, F-5, F-7cables, 1-8GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5GPS Initialization/Verificationestimated position accuracy, 3-41surveyed position accuracy, 3-41GPS satellite system, 3-37Group Line Interface. See GLIHHardware Requirements, 1-6High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optionaltest equipment, 1-11High–impedance conductive wrist strap, required testequipment, 1-9HP 83236A, F-5HP 8921A/600 test set, 1-8HP8921A, F-5
Index – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Index-4HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-38Huber & Suhner, required test equipment, 1-9HyperTerminal, Creating named HyperTerminalconnection, 3-7HyperTerminal , create named connection, 3-7II and Q values, E-1Initial HP8921A setup, F-14Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminaryoperations, 2-1Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, B-1Intermediate file, generate ATP file using, 4-20IS–97 specification, E-1LLANBTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-29optional test equipment, 1-10LAN connectors, external, 2-3LAN termination, 2-3LED Status Combinations for all Modules exceptGLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-28LFR, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6LMF, F-1, F-7BTS connection, 3-21logout procedure, 5-4platform requirements, 1-6remove from BTS, 5-4shut down UNIX, 5-4terminal, 1-6to BTS connection, 3-14, 3-15TX acceptance tests, 4-3view CDF information, 3-3lmf Folder, 3-9loads folder, 3-11Local Maintenance Facility. See LMFLog outof BTS, 5-4of LMF PC, 5-4Logging Into a BTS, 3-23Logging Out, 3-25LORAN–C Initialization/Verification, 3-46LPA errors, 6-9LPA Module LED, 6-34LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-34MMaster Group Line Interface. See MGLIMASTER LED, GLI, 6-31MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-33MMI common connections, 3-28MMI ConnectorCSM, 6-30GLI, 6-32MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-33MMI equipment setup, 3-28Module status indicators, 6-28Multi Channel Card. See MCCMulti–FER test Failure, 6-17NNew installations, 1-4No AMR control, 6-22No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-23No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-24No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specificGLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-25No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-22No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-21No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-23No or missing span line traffic, 6-23North American, cellular telephone system frequencyspectrum, CDMA allocation, D-4OOnline Help, 3-28Optional test equipment, 1-1010 MHz rubidium standard, 1-112–way splitter, 1-10
Index – continued08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-5CDMA subscriber mobile or portableradiotelephone, 1-11duplexer, 1-10frequency counter, 1-10LAN tester, 1-10oscilloscope, 1-10RF circular, 1-11RF test cable, 1-10spectrum analyzer, 1-10Oscilloscope, optional test equipment, 1-10PPCMCIA, Ethernet adapterLMF to BTS connection, 3-21remove from BTS, 5-4Periodic optimization, 1-4Pilot Time Offset. See PNPilot time offset, acceptance test, 4-13Ping, 3-29PNoffset programming information, E-1offset usage, E-1PN offset per sector, E-1PN Offset Usage , E-1Power Input, 6-20Power Meterillustration, F-10Pre–calibration, F-10Power metercalibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-12illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-13required test equipment, 1-8TX acceptance tests, 4-3Power Supply Module Interface, 6-20Pre–calibration, Power Meter, F-10Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3Preliminary operationscell Site types, 2-1test data sheets, A-2Prepare to leave siteconnect BTS E1/T1 spans, 5-5connect BTS T1/E1 spans, 5-5remove external test equipment, 5-3Prepare to leave the sitebringing modules into service, 5-3download code and data from CBSC, 5-3Prerequisites, automated acceptance tests, 4-2Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to theCBSC, 5-1, 6-2, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-1Program, TSU NAM, 3-85Pseudorandom Noise. See PNPWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-33PWR/ALM LEDBBX2, 6-33CSM, 6-29DC/DC Converter, 6-28generic, 6-28MCC, 6-33RRAM code, described, 3-32Report generation, ATP report, 4-20Required test equipmentcommunications system analyzer, 1-6, 1-8digital multimeter, 1-9directional coupler, 1-9Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-7GPIB cables, 1-8high–impedance conductive wrist strap, 1-9power meter, 1-8RF adapters, 1-9RF attenuator, 1-9RF load, 1-9RS232 to GPIB interface, 1-7timing reference cables, 1-9Required test equipment and software, list, 1-6RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-32RFattenuator, 1-9Circular – optional test equipment, 1-11load for required test equipment, 1-9required test equipment load, 1-9test cable, 1-9RF path, fault isolation, 6-12RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-65RFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-26RFDS Calibration, 3-83
Index – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Index-6RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-25RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-33RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-83RhoTX waveform quality acceptance test, 4-12waveform quality requirements, 4-12ROM codedescribed, 3-32downloading, G-1ROM code download Caution, G-1ROM code release level Caution, G-2RS232 to GPIB interfacemodifications required for Automated Testing, 1-7required test equipment, 1-7RXacceptance tests, FER, 4-18antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-11sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-26SSC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-3SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-21SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-7Selecting Test Equipment, 3-57Set Antenna Map Data, 3-81Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-82Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-63Setting Control Port, 3-15Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-64SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-1Site, equipage verification, 3-3Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2Site documents, 1-12site equipage, CDF file, 3-2Site expansion, 1-4Span lineT1/E1 verification equipment, 1-10troubleshooting, 6-35Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-36Span Line connector , 6-20SPANS LED, 6-31Spectral purity, TX mask – primary and redundantBBX, 4-7Spectral purity transmit mask, acceptance test, 4-10Spectrum analyzer, optional test equipment, 1-10STATUS LED, GLI, 6-31Supported Test Sets, 3-48SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-30System Connectivity Test, F-5TT1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-14Tektronics model 2445 test equipment, 1-10Test data sheetsAlarm verification, A-11general optimization checklist, A-4GPS receiver operation, A-5initial power tests, A-3LFR receiver operation, A-6pre–power tests, A-3preliminary operations, A-2RX antenna VSWR, A-11SCLPA convergence, A-7site checklist, A-2TX antenna VSWR, A-10TX BLO, A-8verification of test equipment used, A-1Test equipmentSee also Optional test equipment; Required testequipmentset up, TX output verification/control, 4-3system analyzer, 1-8TX acceptance tests, 4-3verification data sheets, A-1Test equipment connections , F-1Test Equipment Setup, 3-48Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay LevelOffset, 3-62, F-18Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-49Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-69Test Set Calibration, 3-56
Index – continued08/01/2001 1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-7Timing reference cables, required test equipmentModel SGLN1145A/4132A CSMs, 1-9Model SGLN4132B CSMs, 1-9Transmit TX path audit, 3-74Transmit TX path calibration, 3-70TroubleshootingDC Power Problems, 6-24RF path fault isolation, 6-12Set span configuration, 6-36span problems, 6-35TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-25TX level accuracy fault isolation, 6-14Troubleshooting CSM Checklist, 6-18TXacceptance testscode domain power/noise floor, 4-15equipment setup, 4-3pilot time offset, 4-13spectral purity mask, 4-9spectrum analyzer display, 4-11waveform quality (rho), 4-12all inclusive TX ATP test, 4-4antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-10, A-11BLO test data sheets, A-8level accuracy fault isolation, 6-14output acceptance testscode domain power noise, 4-7pilot time offset, 4-7waveform quality, 4-7TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-65TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-2TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-25TX Audit Test, 3-75TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipmentsetup calibration, 3-61TX Calibration Test, 3-72tx fine adjust, E-1TX Path Calibration, 3-66TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-2UUNIX, shut down on LMF, 5-4Unshielded Twisted Pair. See UTPUpdating CDMA LMF Files, 5-1UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-21VVerifytest equipment used, test data sheets, A-1TX output, 4-3Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-33version Folder, 3-11Virtual BTS, 1-15WWaveform quality (Rho), acceptance test procedure,4-12When to optimizeBTS, B-1inter–frame cabling, B-1XXCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-20Xircom Model PE3–10B2LMF to BTS connection, 3-21remove from BTS, 5-4
Index – continuedPRELIMINARY1X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATP 08/01/2001Index-8Notes
1X SCt4812ET Lite BTSOptimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x800 MHz and 1900 MHzCDMAEnglish08/01/200168P09253A60–1PRELIMINARY
English08/01/200168P09253A60–11X SCt4812ET Lite BTS Optimization/ATPSoftware Release 2.16.0.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.16.x.x800 MHz and 1900 MHzCDMAPRELIMINARY

Navigation menu